Rohde & Schwarz SMU200A Operating Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Rohde & Schwarz Manuals
  4. Inverter
  5. R&S SMU200A
  6. Operating manual

Rohde & Schwarz SMU200A Operating Manual

Vector signal generator
Hide thumbs Also See for SMU200A:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual See also: Manual
®
R&S
SMU200A
Vector Signal Generator
Operating Manual
(:7ð]P)
1007.9845.32 ─ 15

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the SMU200A and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Subscribe to Our Youtube Channel

Related Manuals for Rohde & Schwarz SMU200A

Summary of Contents for Rohde & Schwarz SMU200A

  • Page 1 ® R&S SMU200A Vector Signal Generator Operating Manual (:7ð]P) 1007.9845.32 ─ 15...
  • Page 2 ® This document describes the R&S SMU200A, stock no. 1141.2005.02 and its options. ● ® R&S SMU-B9/B10/B11 ● ® R&S SMU-B13 ● R&S ® SMU-B16 ● ® R&S SMU-B17 ● ® R&S SMU-B18 ● R&S ® SMU-B20 ● ® R&S SMU-B22 ●...
  • Page 3 Basic Safety Instructions Always read through and comply with the following safety instructions! All plants and locations of the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies make every effort to keep the safety standards of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of safety. Our products and the auxiliary equipment they require are designed, built and tested in accordance with the safety standards that apply in each case.
  • Page 4 Basic Safety Instructions Tags and their meaning The following signal words are used in the product documentation in order to warn the reader about risks and dangers. indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
  • Page 5 Basic Safety Instructions Electrical safety If the information on electrical safety is not observed either at all to the extent necessary, electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury or death may occur. 1. Prior to switching on the product, always ensure that the nominal voltage setting on the product matches the nominal voltage of the AC supply network.
  • Page 6 Basic Safety Instructions 14. Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage (such as that caused by a bolt of lightning) can reach the product. Otherwise, the person operating the product will be exposed to the danger of an electric shock. 15.
  • Page 7 Basic Safety Instructions Repair and service 1. The product may be opened only by authorized, specially trained personnel. Before any work is performed on the product or before the product is opened, it must be disconnected from the AC supply network.
  • Page 8 Informaciones elementales de seguridad 2. Handles on the products are designed exclusively to enable personnel to transport the product. It is therefore not permissible to use handles to fasten the product to or on transport equipment such as cranes, fork lifts, wagons, etc. The user is responsible for securely fastening the products to or on the means of transport or lifting.
  • Page 9 Informaciones elementales de seguridad Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado conforme a las indicaciones de la correspondiente documentación del producto y dentro del margen de rendimiento definido (ver hoja de datos, documentación, informaciones de seguridad que siguen). El uso del producto hace necesarios conocimientos técnicos y ciertos conocimientos del idioma inglés.
  • Page 10 Informaciones elementales de seguridad Palabras de señal y su significado En la documentación del producto se utilizan las siguientes palabras de señal con el fin de advertir contra riesgos y peligros. PELIGRO identifica un peligro inminente con riesgo elevado que provocará...
  • Page 11 Informaciones elementales de seguridad Seguridad eléctrica Si no se siguen (o se siguen de modo insuficiente) las indicaciones del fabricante en cuanto a seguridad eléctrica, pueden producirse choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte. 1. Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto se deberá comprobar siempre que la tensión preseleccionada en el producto coincida con la de la red de alimentación eléctrica.
  • Page 12 Informaciones elementales de seguridad 12. Si un producto se instala en un lugar fijo, se deberá primero conectar el conductor de protección fijo con el conductor de protección del producto antes de hacer cualquier otra conexión. La instalación y la conexión deberán ser efectuadas por un electricista especializado. 13.
  • Page 13 Informaciones elementales de seguridad 5. Ciertos productos, como p. ej. las instalaciones de radiocomunicación RF, pueden a causa de su función natural, emitir una radiación electromagnética aumentada. Deben tomarse todas las medidas necesarias para la protección de las mujeres embarazadas. También las personas con marcapasos pueden correr peligro a causa de la radiación electromagnética.
  • Page 14 Informaciones elementales de seguridad 6. En caso de falta de estanqueidad de una celda, el líquido vertido no debe entrar en contacto con la piel ni los ojos. Si se produce contacto, lavar con agua abundante la zona afectada y avisar a un médico.
  • Page 15 Sicherheitshinweise Kundeninformation zur Batterieverordnung (BattV) Dieses Gerät enthält eine schadstoffhaltige Batterie. Diese darf nicht mit dem Hausmüll entsorgt werden. Nach Ende der Lebensdauer darf die Entsorgung nur über eine Rohde&Schwarz-Kundendienststelle oder eine geeig- nete Sammelstelle erfolgen. Safety Regulations for Batteries (according to BattV) This equipment houses a battery containing harmful sub- stances that must not be disposed of as normal household...
  • Page 16 Customer Information Regarding Product Disposal The German Electrical and Electronic Equipment (ElektroG) Act is an implementation of the following EC directives: • 2002/96/EC on waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE) and • 2002/95/EC on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in e lectrical and electronic equipment (RoHS).
  • Page 17 Qualitätszertifikat Certified Quality System ISO 9001 Certificate of quality Certified Environmental System Certificat de qualité ISO 14001 Sehr geehrter Kunde, Dear Customer, Cher client, Sie haben sich für den Kauf eines You have decided to buy a Vous avez choisi d’acheter un pro- Rohde &...
  • Page 18 EC Certificate of Conformity Certificate No.: 2003-47, Page 1 This is to certify that: Equipment type Stock No. Designation SMU200A 1141.2005.02 Vector Signal Generator SMU-B9 1161.0766.02 Baseband Generator SMU-B10 1141.7007.02 Baseband Generator SMU-B11 1159.8411.02 Baseband Generator SMU-B13 1141.8003.02/.04 Baseband Main Modul SMU-B14 1160.1800.02...
  • Page 19 EC Certificate of Conformity Certificate No.: 2003-47, Page 2 This is to certify that: Equipment type Stock No. Designation SMU-B31 1159.8011.02/.04 High Power Output for 1st RF Path SMU-B32 1160.0256.02 Overvoltage Protection and high Power for 1st HF-Pfad SMU-B35 1160.0633.02 Overvoltage Protection for 2nd HF-Pfad SMU-B36 1160.1000.02/.04...
  • Page 20 EC Certificate of Conformity Certificate No.: 2007-58 This is to certify that: Equipment type Stock No. Designation SMU-B18 1159.6954.02 Digital Baseband Output complies with the provisions of the Directive of the Council of the European Union on the approximation of the laws of the Member States - relating to electromagnetic compatibility (2004/108/EC) Conformity is proven by compliance with the following standards:...

  • Page 21: Customer Support

    Customer Support Technical support – where and when you need it For quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz equipment, contact one of our Customer Support Centers. A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation, programming or applications of Rohde &...
  • Page 22 Address List Headquarters, Plants and Subsidiaries Locations Worldwide Headquarters Please refer to our homepage: www.rohde-schwarz.com ◆ Sales Locations ROHDE&SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG Phone +49 (89) 41 29-0 Mühldorfstraße 15 · D-81671 München Fax +49 (89) 41 29-121 64 ◆ Service Locations P.O.Box 80 14 69 ·...

  • Page 23: Table Of Contents

    ® Contents R&S SMU200A Contents 1 Preface....................15 Documentation Overview...................15 Conventions Used in the Documentation..............16 2 Preparing for Use.................19 Front Panel Tour......................19 2.1.1 Utility Keys........................20 2.1.2 Standby LEDs and Standby Key...................20 2.1.3 Display..........................21 2.1.4 Setup Keys........................21 2.1.4.1 Keys for Setting Paramters...................21 2.1.4.2...
  • Page 24 ® Contents R&S SMU200A 2.6.1 Connecting the Instrument to the Network..............43 2.6.2 Assigning the IP Address....................44 2.6.3 Using computer names....................45 2.6.4 Changing the Windows Firewall Settings..............45 2.6.5 Working with Directories....................46 Remote Access via an External Controller...............46 2.7.1 Using a Web Browser for Remote Access..............48 2.7.2...
  • Page 25 ® Contents R&S SMU200A 4.2.2.2 Messages........................91 4.2.2.3 Volatile messages......................91 4.2.2.4 Permanent Messages....................92 4.2.3 Info Window........................92 4.2.4 Block Diagram ......................93 4.2.4.1 Function Blocks in the Block Diagram................93 4.2.4.2 Signal Flow and Input/Output Symbols in the Block Diagram........94 4.2.5 Winbar and Softkeys.....................95 4.2.6...
  • Page 26 ® Contents R&S SMU200A Overview of Instrument Functions................123 General Instrument Settings..................126 5.2.1 Overview of General Instrument Settings..............126 5.2.2 Default Instrument Settings - Preset Key..............126 5.2.3 General Configuration of Instrument - Setup Key............127 5.2.3.1 Internal Adjustments....................128 5.2.3.2 Hardware Config......................130 5.2.3.3 Software / Options.......................131 5.2.3.4...
  • Page 27 ® Contents R&S SMU200A 5.2.8.3 Loading Instrument Settings..................159 5.2.8.4 File Manager.......................160 Graphical Display - Graphics...................162 5.3.1 Graphics Settings Menu....................163 5.3.2 Bar of Graphics Window.....................166 5.3.3 Signal Displays......................168 5.3.3.1 I/Q Diagram.........................168 5.3.3.2 Vector Diagram......................169 5.3.3.3 Constellation Diagram....................170 5.3.3.4 Eye Diagram.......................171 5.3.3.5 CCDF Display......................172...
  • Page 28 ® Contents R&S SMU200A 5.5.2.1 RF frequency vs. RF output frequency...............196 5.5.2.2 Configuring RF frequency...................197 5.5.2.3 Frequency Menu......................197 5.5.3 Phase Settings......................199 5.5.3.1 Phase Menu........................199 5.5.3.2 Phase Continuous Frequency Setting.................200 5.5.4 Reference Oscillator....................204 5.5.4.1 Reference Oscillator Dialog..................204 5.5.5 Local Oscillator - LO Coupling..................206 5.5.5.1...
  • Page 29 ® Contents R&S SMU200A 5.5.12.1 LF Generator Overview....................246 5.5.12.2 LF Output........................246 5.5.13 Sweep Mode.......................247 5.5.13.1 Overview........................247 5.5.13.2 RF Frequency Sweep....................248 5.5.13.3 RF Level Sweep......................254 5.5.13.4 LF Frequency Sweep....................261 5.5.14 List Mode........................266 5.5.14.1 List Mode Dialog......................267 5.5.14.2 Filling the List Mode Data automatically..............274 I/Q Modulation - I/Q Mod Block................275...
  • Page 30 ® Contents R&S SMU200A 5.8.2.2 Internal Modulation Data from Lists................328 5.8.2.3 External Synchronous Modulation Data..............329 5.8.2.4 Clock Signals......................330 5.8.2.5 Synchronizing Data Signals and Clock Signals............331 5.8.2.6 Control Signals......................334 5.8.2.7 Trigger Signals......................336 5.8.2.8 Marker Output Signals....................337 5.8.3 Digital Modulation - Custom Digital Modulation............337 5.8.3.1...
  • Page 31 ® Contents R&S SMU200A 6.1.4.1 GPIB Interface Messages...................453 6.1.4.2 GPIB Instrument Address...................454 Starting a Remote Control Session.................455 6.2.1 Switching to Remote Control..................455 6.2.2 Returning to Manual Operation...................456 6.2.3 Examples........................457 6.2.3.1 Remote Control over GPIB..................457 6.2.3.2 Remote Control over LAN using VXI-11 Protocol............458 6.2.3.3...
  • Page 32 ® Contents R&S SMU200A 7 Remote Control Commands..............489 Common Commands....................489 Preset Commands.....................494 R&S Signal Generator Waveform and List Format..........496 7.3.1 Tag Description......................496 7.3.2 Creating a Waveform Manually...................509 BERT and BLER Subsystems..................513 CALibration Subsystem...................523 CLOCk Subsystem....................526 DIAGnostic Subsystem....................527 DISPlay Subsystem....................529 FORMat Subsystem....................530 7.10...
  • Page 33 ® Contents R&S SMU200A 7.15.5 SOURce:CORRection Subsystem................698 7.15.6 SOURce:FM Subsystem.....................707 7.15.7 SOURce:FREQuency Subsystem................710 7.15.8 SOURce:INPut Subsystem..................720 7.15.9 SOURce:IQ Subsystem....................723 7.15.10 SOURce:IQ:OUTput Subsystem.................728 7.15.10.1 Analog I/Q Outputs......................728 7.15.10.2 Digital I/Q Outputs.......................733 7.15.11 SOURce:LFOutput Subsystem...................739 7.15.12 SOURce:LIST Subsystem...................747 7.15.13 SOURce:MODulation Subsystem................759 7.15.14 SOURce:PATH Subsystem..................760...
  • Page 34 ® Contents R&S SMU200A 9.2.2 Permanent messages....................832 SCPI-Error Messages....................833 Device-Specific Error Messages................833 A Hardware Interfaces................837 AUX I/O Connector....................837 Monitor Connector (MONITOR)................838 BERT Connector.......................839 List of Commands................841 Index....................856 Operating Manual 1007.9845.32 ─ 15...

  • Page 35: Preface

    ® Preface R&S SMU200A Documentation Overview 1 Preface 1.1 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R&S SMU consists of the following parts: ● Online Help system on the instrument, ● "Quick Start Guide" printed manual, ● Documentation CD-ROM with: Online help system (*.chm) as a standalone help,...

  • Page 36: Conventions Used In The Documentation

    ® Preface R&S SMU200A Conventions Used in the Documentation ● Digital Standard 3GPP FDD, 3GPP FDD enhanced MS/BS tests incl. HSDPA, 3GPP FDD HSUPA, 3GPP FDD HSPA+ ● Digital Standard GPS and Assisted GPS ● ® Digital Standard CDMA2000 incl. 1xEV-DV ●...
  • Page 37 ® Preface R&S SMU200A Conventions Used in the Documentation Typographical conventions Convention Description "Graphical user interface elements" All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen, such as dialog boxes, menus, options, but- tons, and softkeys are enclosed by parentheses.

  • Page 39: Preparing For Use

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Front Panel Tour 2 Preparing for Use The following topics will help you to get familiar with the instrument and perform the first steps: ● Front Panel Tour ● Rear Panel Tour ● Putting into Operation This section explains the control elements and connectors of the Signal Generator R&S...

  • Page 40: Utility Keys

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Front Panel Tour 2.1.1 Utility Keys The keys to the left of the display cause the R&S SMU to return to a definite instrument state and provide information on the instrument and assistance. For more information refer to chapter "Instrument Settings".

  • Page 41: Display

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Front Panel Tour See also chapter 2.3.4.1, "Standby and Ready state", on page 35. 2.1.3 Display The large display clearly shows all main settings and signal generator states. The display is divided into three sections: ●...

  • Page 42: Display Keys

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Front Panel Tour In the two-path mode, the frequency entry field that was active last is activated. Pressing the key again activates frequency entry for the second path. RF ON/OFF Switches the RF signal on and off.

  • Page 43: Keypad For Data Entry

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Front Panel Tour ● Closes all kinds of dialog boxes, if the edit mode is not active. ● Quits the edit mode, if the edit mode is active. ● Switches between different entry fields of a menu.

  • Page 44: Rotary Knob And Navigation Keys

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Front Panel Tour Keys Description 0...9/abc Enters the corresponding numbers (in numeric input fields) or characters (character input fields). Inserts a decimal point (numeric input fields) or dot (character input fields) at the cursor posi- tion.

  • Page 45: Front Panel Connectors

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Front Panel Tour ROTARY KNOB The rotary knob has several functions: ● Increases (clockwise direction) or decreases (counter-clockwise direction) numeric values at a defined step width in editing mode ● Moves the cursor, e.g. to a function block in the block diagram ●...
  • Page 46 ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Front Panel Tour CLOCK Signal for Path A only. Input for external clock signal (bit or symbol clock, multiple of symbol clock) for synchro- nizing the external data signal in case of multivalent modulation. The active edge can be set.

  • Page 47: Rear Panel Tour

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Rear Panel Tour SENSOR Connector for R&S NRP-Zxx sensors. With the aid of the "User Correction" function, a table with correction values for external test assemblies can be automatically determined, e.g. for compensating the frequency response of cables.

  • Page 48: Description Of The Connectors

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Rear Panel Tour 2.2.1 Description of the Connectors (path A only) Output for internal LF modulation generator signal. See also data sheet and chapter 5.5.12.1, "LF Generator Overview", on page 246, chapter 5.5.12.2, "LF Output", on page 246.
  • Page 49 ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Rear Panel Tour I OUT BAR / Q OUT BAR (path A or path B) Differential (inverting) output for analog I/Q signal. See also chapter 5.7.3, "Output of the Baseband Signal - I/Q Out", on page 308.
  • Page 50 ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Rear Panel Tour MONITOR Connector for external monitor (see chapter 2.4.2, "Connecting a Monitor", on page 40). For description of this connector, refer to chapter 1.2, "Monitor Connector (MONITOR)", on page 838. AUX I/O Parallel input/output for data signals as well as settable trigger and control signals of the baseband.

  • Page 51: Putting Into Operation

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Putting into Operation LO IN, LO OUT Local oscillator input and output: ● LO IN: Input for external LO signals ● LO OUT: Output for internal LO signals. See also chapter 5.5.5, "Local Oscillator - LO Coupling", on page 206.
  • Page 52 ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Putting into Operation Shock hazard Do not open the instrument casing. As a rule, normal operation of the instrument does not require opening the casing. Observe the general safety instructions and regulations at the beginning of the manual.

  • Page 53: Unpacking And Checking The Instrument

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Putting into Operation EMI impact on measurement results Electromagnetic interference (EMI) can affect the measurement results. To avoid any impact, make sure that the following conditions are met: ● Use suitable double-shielded cables. ●...

  • Page 54: Connecting The Instrument To The Ac Supply

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Putting into Operation Risk of injury The feet may fold in if they are not folded out completely or if the instrument is shifted. Fold the feet completely in or completely out to ensure stability of the instrument and personal safety.

  • Page 55: Standby And Ready State

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Putting into Operation Starting up instruments with power switch Connect the instrument to the AC supply. 2. To turn the power on, press the main power switch to position I (On). After power-up, the instrument is in...

  • Page 56: Function Check

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Putting into Operation Use the PRESET key to return the instrument to its definite reset/preset state, if the cur- rent setup is not anymore relevant. To customise the start settings, use the "File" dialog.
  • Page 57 ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Putting into Operation The PRESET key calls up a defined instrument setup. All parameters and switching states are preset (also those of inactive operating modes). The default instrument settings provide a reproducible initial basis for all other settings. However, functions that concern the integration of the instrument into a measurement setup are not changed, e.g.

  • Page 58: Shutting Down The Instrument

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Connecting External Accessories 2.3.5 Shutting Down the Instrument To shut down the R&S SMU, proceed as described bellow. Risk of losing data If you switch off the running instrument using the rear panel switch or by disconnecting the power cord, the instrument loses its current settings.
  • Page 59 ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Connecting External Accessories The following list shows various USB devices that can be useful: ● Memory stick for easy transfer of data to/from a computer (e.g. firmware updates) ● CD-ROM drives for easy installation of firmware applications ●...

  • Page 60: Connecting A Monitor

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Windows Operating System "Add Printer" wizard on the "Start > Settings > Printer and Faxes" menu to install the driver. To access Windows XP, press the Windows key on the external keyboard. 2.4.2 Connecting a Monitor An external monitor with an analog interface can be connected to the MONITOR con- nector on the rear panel of the instrument.
  • Page 61 ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Windows Operating System Risk of causing instrument unusability The instrument is equipped with the Windows XP operating system. Additional software can therefore be installed on the instrument. The use and installation of additional soft- ware may impair instrument function.

  • Page 62: Setting Up A Network (Lan) Connection

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection Accessing Start menu The Windows XP "Start" menu provides access to the Windows XP functionality and installed programs. To open the "Start" menu, press the Windows key or the CTRL + ESC key combination on your keyboard.

  • Page 63: Connecting The Instrument To The Network

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection Accessing Operating System The operating system can only be accessed if an external keyboard and/or a mouse is connected. Windows XP provides an on-screen keyboard that can be operated using a mouse, thus enabling operation by mouse only.

  • Page 64: Assigning The Ip Address

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection 2.6.2 Assigning the IP Address Depending on the network capacities, the TCP/IP address information for the instrument can be obtained in different ways. ● If the network supports dynamic TCP/IP configuration using the Dynamic Host Con- figuration Protocol (DHCP), all address information can be assigned automatically.

  • Page 65: Using Computer Names

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection 2.6.3 Using computer names Alternatively to the IP address, each PC or instrument connected in a LAN can be accessed via an unambiguous computer name. Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name, but this name can be changed.

  • Page 66: Working With Directories

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Remote Access via an External Controller 2.6.5 Working with Directories Access to network drives depends on access rights and whether the drives in question have been enabled. The complete integration of the R&S Signal Generator into a larger network with the necessary allocation of rights is highly complex and normally performed by a network administrator.
  • Page 67 ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Remote Access via an External Controller For an overview of the instrument's operating concept and the different ways to control and operate the instrument, see chapter 3.1, "Brief Introduction to the Instrument's Con- cept", on page 65.

  • Page 68: Using A Web Browser For Remote Access

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Remote Access via an External Controller the instrument and an external computer with Windows operating system. Remote access via an external computer with Linux/Unix operating system is performed accord- ingly. Accessing Operating System The operating system can only be accessed if an external keyboard and/or a mouse is connected.

  • Page 69: Remote Desktop Connection

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Remote Access via an External Controller The default password is "instrument". After the connection is established, the current signal generator screen with the block diagram is displayed and the instrument can be remote-accessed from the remote computer.
  • Page 70 ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Remote Access via an External Controller Note: Remote Desktop access and firewall settings. When you enable or disable the Windows Remote Desktop option (in the "System Properties"), the associated firewall settings are adapted automatically.

  • Page 71: Remote Access Via Ultr@Vnc

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Remote Access via an External Controller If you need to access drives of the remote PC from the instrument (e.g. in order to store settings or to copy files from the PC to the instrument), activate the "Disk drives"...
  • Page 72 ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Remote Access via an External Controller Risk of Unauthorized Access If the VNC application is enabled on the instrument, any user in the network who knows the computer name and login data can access it. To prevent this, make sure that the VNC server service on the instrument is disabled.
  • Page 73 ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Remote Access via an External Controller a) Select installation of all components. b) In the "Additional Task Panel", enable all entries. A successful installation is indicated by a message. At the same time a warning is displayed stating that a password must be set.
  • Page 74 ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Remote Access via an External Controller 5. Enter a password with a length of at least five digits. This password is used on the remote computer to access the instrument. Other set- tings may be changed according to the user-specific security requirements.
  • Page 75 ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Remote Access via an External Controller 3. In the "Exceptions" tab, enable "Run Ultr@VNC SERVER". Installing the VNC Viewer on a Windows PC 1. Download the Ultr@VNC program form internet and follow the installation instruc- tions.
  • Page 76 ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Remote Access via an External Controller Setting up the VNC connection on the Linux/Unix remote computer The VNC program is available per default for Linux/Unix operating systems. 1. Start a Web browser on the remote computer and enter the IP address of the instru- ment.

  • Page 77: Using Virus-Protection Software

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A Using Virus-Protection Software Enabled Direct Control The direct control of the instrument is not disabled and the instrument can be controled from the front panel and via the remote computer alternately. Terminating VNC Connection The remote access via VNC connection can be terminated either on the R&S SMU or on...

  • Page 78: Lxi Configuration

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A LXI Configuration However, Symantec Antivirus may affect the behaviour of the instrument in terms of set- tling time or stability. Symantec Antivirus 10.1.7.7000 has been subjected to detailed tests with R&S Signal Generator and a page file of 1024 MB. The system remains very reliable.
  • Page 79 ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A LXI Configuration Like GPIB, LXI determines and standardizes the way the instrument behaves in a LAN. The LXI implementation by the R&S Signal Generators allows you to change certain LAN settings, to reset the LAN connection as well as function for easy instrument identification.

  • Page 80: Lxi Browser Interface

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A LXI Configuration Firmware update After a firmware update, shut-down and re-start the instrument in order to enable the full LXI functionality. Default state of the network settings According to the LXI standard, an LCI must set the following parameters to a default state.

  • Page 81: Lan Configuration

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A LXI Configuration The "Instrument Home Page" displays the device information required by the LXI stand- ard including the VISA resource string in read-only format. ► Press the "Inactive (press to toggle)" button to indicate the device.

  • Page 82: Advanced Lan Configuration

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A LXI Configuration The "TCP/IP Mode" configuration field controls how the IP address for the instrument gets assigned (see also chapter 2.6.2, "Assigning the IP Address", on page 44). For the manual configuration mode, the static IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway are used to configure the LAN.

  • Page 83: Ping

    ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A LXI Configuration The "Advanced LAN Configuration" parameters are used as follows: ● The "Negotiation" configuration field provides different Ethernet speed and duplex mode settings. In general, the "Auto Detect" mode is sufficient. ● "ICMP Ping" must be enabled to use the ping utility.
  • Page 84 ® Preparing for Use R&S SMU200A LXI Configuration Operating Manual 1007.9845.32 ─ 15...

  • Page 85: Getting Started

    ® Getting Started R&S SMU200A Brief Introduction to the Instrument's Concept 3 Getting Started This section helps you to get familiar with the R&S SMU and provides an introduction to the general concept of the instrument with a sample of the possible application fields as well as a description of the main blocks in the signal generation flow.
  • Page 86 ® Getting Started R&S SMU200A Brief Introduction to the Instrument's Concept Each block represents a functional unit of the instrument. Thus the user always knows the position at which a parameter has an effect in the signal flow. The main settings of a block are indicated in the block.

  • Page 87: Applications Of The Instrument

    ® Getting Started R&S SMU200A Applications of the Instrument For an introduction into the manual operating of the instrument, detailed operating instructions and an overview of menus refer to chapter 4, "Manual Operation", on page 85. For an indepth description of the dialog boxes and the instrument functions refer to sec- tion "Instrument Fuctions".
  • Page 88 ® Getting Started R&S SMU200A Applications of the Instrument In this case the instrument must be equipped with ● at least one baseband generator (option R&S SMU-B10) and ● at least one baseband main module (option R&S SMU-B13). Fading scenarios can be created with the aid of a fading module (option R&S SMU-B14, Fading Simulator).

  • Page 89: Two Baseband Generators, One Rf Path

    ® Getting Started R&S SMU200A Applications of the Instrument Fig. 3-3: Operation of I/Q modulator with external I/Q signals applied to the baseband section Analog Wideband I/Q operation An external analog I/Q signal is directly applied to the I/Q modulator of the R&S SMU. In this mode, the entire bandwidth of the I/Q modulator can be utilized.

  • Page 90: One Baseband Path And Two Rf Paths

    ® Getting Started R&S SMU200A Applications of the Instrument ● Generation of multicarrier signals with real time components ● Simulation of antenna diversity Fig. 3-5: Operation of R&S Signal Generator with two baseband generators and one RF path 3.2.3 One Baseband Path and Two RF Paths...

  • Page 91: Fully Equipped Two-Path Instrument

    ® Getting Started R&S SMU200A Baseband Section 3.2.4 Fully Equipped Two-Path Instrument Examples of the possible applications of a fully equipped two-path instrument are: ● Generation of a wanted signal and an interfering signal for receiver tests ● Generation of multicarrier signals with extremely wide bandwidth (>80 MHz) ●...
  • Page 92 ® Getting Started R&S SMU200A Baseband Section One or two baseband generators can be fitted in an R&S SMU and operated separately. Signals from the baseband generators can be routed from path A to B and vice versa, and added (possibly with frequency offset).

  • Page 93: Description Of Individual Diagram Blocks Of The Baseband Section

    ® Getting Started R&S SMU200A Baseband Section Software option R&S SMU-B71 comprises the 3GPP dynamic fading configurations moving propagation and birth-death propagation as well as the fine delay fading config- urations offering enhanced delay resolution. Digital output module (option R&S SMU-B18) The R&S SMU can be equipped with a standardized digital I/Q interface (LVDS) for online...
  • Page 94 ® Getting Started R&S SMU200A Baseband Section Baseband B block Configures the second baseband source (if installed). The block is displayed only if the instrument contains two baseband generators. Depending on the installed software option, various digital standards, user-configured digital real time modulation or the built- in waveform generator (ARB) can be selected.

  • Page 95: Rf Section

    ® Getting Started R&S SMU200A RF Section BERT block In this block an integrated bit and block error rate tester can be set. The bit error tester makes it possible to evaluate a signal demodulated and decoded by a DUT by measuring the bit error rate.

  • Page 96: Attenuator Settings

    ® Getting Started R&S SMU200A RF Section I/Q Mod A block The (first) I/Q modulator is configured in this block. Also the Analog Wideband I/Q mode can be selected here, which allows external I/Q signals to be directly applied to the I/Q modulator, i.e.

  • Page 97: Example Of Setup

    ® Getting Started R&S SMU200A Example of Setup Note: For modulation modes that can be simultaneously used, refer to the R&S SMU data sheet. RF/A Mod B In this block, settings are made for analog modulation and RF parameters of path B. This block is displayed only if a second RF path is installed.
  • Page 98 ® Getting Started R&S SMU200A Example of Setup a) Turn the rotary knob and select the "Baseband A" block. b) Press the rotary knob to open the menu where the digital modulation can be selected (different modulation modes are available depending on the options installed).
  • Page 99 ® Getting Started R&S SMU200A Example of Setup c) Turn the rotary knob and highlight "Custom Digital Mod...". Press the rotary knob to open the "Custom Dig. Mod." dialog. d) Turn the rotary knob to select parameter "Symbol Rate", press the rotary knob to allow editing and enter the preffered symbol rate with the aid of the numeric key- pad and the unit keys.
  • Page 100 ® Getting Started R&S SMU200A Example of Setup e) Turn the rotary knob to select parameter "Coding". Press the button to open the selection list. Turn the rotary knob to select "Off" and press the knob to activate the selected item.
  • Page 101 ® Getting Started R&S SMU200A Example of Setup g) Finally, select "State" and press the rotary knob to switch on the digital modula- tion. h) Press the DIAGRAM key to display the complete block diagram. To indicate the active state, the "Baseband" block is displayed in blue.
  • Page 102 ® Getting Started R&S SMU200A Example of Setup The entry in the Winbar indicates that the "Custom Dig. Mod." menu is still open in the background. To display the menu in the foreground, press the softkey below the button in the "Windbar".
  • Page 103 ® Getting Started R&S SMU200A Example of Setup 4. Select graphics display of I/Q signal a) Turn the rotary knob to select the "Graphics" block and open the respective menu. b) Select "State On" with the rotary knob to activate display of the I/Q diagram.

  • Page 105: Manual Operation

    ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Key Features 4 Manual Operation The R&S SMU can be operated intuitively either via the interactive block diagram or via a menu tree. All menus are in the form of windows that can be operated in the same way.
  • Page 106 ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Key Features In this block all digital standards and the digital modulation can be selected. Function blocks displayed with a blue frame can be directly switched on and off by means of the TOGGLE ON/OFF (CTRL+T) key. In the example, digital modulation can be acti- vated in this way.
  • Page 107 ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Key Features ● Turning the rotary knob shifts the entry focus to the target element. ● Pressing the rotary knob activates the selected entry field. Depending on the parameter, the submenu is called, the numeric value varied, the list entry selected or the check box activated or deactivated.
  • Page 108 ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Key Features Help func tions for user support Numerous help functions support the user in signal configuration. ● Value ranges The valid setting range is displayed for each numeric parameter. This requires a short wait after activation of the entry field. The range is then displayed automatically after a few seconds.

  • Page 109: Display

    ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Display Graphics editor for definition of control signals Control signals are also graphically configured. Graphical display of output signal in a diagram The output signal can be graphically displayed in a number of diagrams. This allows a fast check of signal characteristics.

  • Page 110: Settings Displayed In The Header Section

    ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Display ● The block diagram shows the instrument configuration, the signal characteristic as well as the inputs and outputs used and permits interactive operation via graphics elements. Active menus and graphs are displayed on top of the block diagram.

  • Page 111: Status Information And Messages

    ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Display 4.2.2 Status Information and Messages The status information and messages are displayed in the header section of the screen. The messages differ with respect to their importance (errors, warnings, info) and the time of their appearance (brief and permanent messages). They require different treatment by the user.

  • Page 112: Permanent Messages

    ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Display 4.2.2.4 Permanent Messages Permanent messages are displayed if an error occurs that impairs further instrument operation, e.g. a hardware fault. The error signalled by a permanent message must be eliminated before correct instrument operation can be ensured.

  • Page 113: Block Diagram

    ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Display This button is available only if the history of the messages is displayed. SCPI command: on page 791 SYSTem:ERRor:ALL Each time a SYST:ERR:ALL? query is sent, the error queue is returned and at the same time cleared.

  • Page 114: Signal Flow And Input/Output Symbols In The Block Diagram

    ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Display Status information is displayed below the check box. It is different for the different blocks. In the baseband block, for instance, the selected modulation and associated additional information, e.g. the number of channels, are indicated.

  • Page 115: Winbar And Softkeys

    ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Display The signal flow is configured in the individual menus. User interfaces are configured in: ● the "Setup > USER Marker /AUX I/O Settings" dialog and ● the "Setup > Global Trigger/Clock/External Inputs" dialog. 4.2.5 Winbar and Softkeys The "Winbar"...

  • Page 116: Graphical Display Of Output Signal Characteristics

    ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Accessing Dialogs Each of the setting fields is assigned a parameter name. The kind of setting varies depending on the parameter to be set. Some settings can only be made in a specific configuration. If setting is not permitted with the specific configuration selected, the respective item is disabled and displayed in gray and the entry or selection field cannot be accessed.
  • Page 117 ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Accessing Dialogs An alternatively way to access a dialog is to use the Winbar buttons or front-panel softkeys or to use the HIDE (CTRl+H), CLOSE (ESC), DIAGRAM (CTRL+D) and REARR (CTRL +A) keys on the front panel.

  • Page 118: Setting Parameters

    ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Setting Parameters Keyboard Shortcuts Keyboard shortcuts (e.g. "Ctrl + D" for the displaying the block diagram in the foreground) provide direct access to all utility dialogs of the instrument (see chapter 4.8, "Legend of Front-Panel Controls", on page 119).

  • Page 119: Working With The Cursor

    ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Setting Parameters ● chapter 4.4.2, "Selecting a Control Element", on page 99 ● chapter 4.4.3, "Switching Parameters On/Off", on page 99 ● chapter 4.4.4, "Entering a Value", on page 100 ● chapter 4.4.5, "Working with Units ", on page 102...

  • Page 120: Entering A Value

    ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Setting Parameters 1. Select the parameter. 2. To change the state of a parameter, use the "Enter" function of the different control media: ● Press the rotary knob ● Press ENTER ● Press the TOGGLE ON OFF (CTRL+T) key.
  • Page 121 ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Setting Parameters The cursor is displayed in blue and the number to be replaced is highlighted. 3. Click on a numeric key to overwrite the highlighted value. Varying a value 1. Activate the editing mode.

  • Page 122: Working With Units

    ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Setting Parameters 4.4.5 Working with Units The unit of a parameter is displayed next to the value. When the parameter is edited, the unit is selected either from the list or by means of the front-panel keys. When the entry is completed, the unit can be changed.

  • Page 123: Terminating Entries With Confirmation

    ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Setting Parameters a) Turn the rotary knob or use the UP/DOWN arrow keys. The selected item is highlighted. b) Press TOGGLE ON/OFF key several times until the preffered entry is displayed in the selection field.

  • Page 124: Restoring The Previous Value

    ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Setting Parameters 4.4.8 Restoring the Previous Value Parameter variations with the rotary knob are immediately set and therefore not reversi- ble. Normally, values cannot be restored in the case of mouse control because no explicit confirmation is required in this case and entries are automatically confirmed when the entry or selection field is exited.

  • Page 125: Editors

    ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Editors 4.5 Editors The R&S SMU provides user-friendly editors for defining data lists as well as control and marker signals. Lists containing frequency and level value pairs are used for the list mode and the user- defined level correction.

  • Page 126: Working With Data Editor

    ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Editors 3. Use the numeric keys to enter the value for the value pairs in the "Frequency/Hz" and "Power/dBm" table columns. A blank row is inserted at the end of the list. An existing list can be edited in the insert or overwrite mode; use the INSERT key to toggle between this two modes.
  • Page 127 ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Editors Editing an existing data list 1. To access a data editor and open an existing data list for editing, use the arrow keys to select the associated button "Edit Data List... " in the individual menu.

  • Page 128: Working With Control And Marker List Editor

    ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Editors Each four bits are displayed as a hexadecimal value: To increase readability, the hexadecimal values in turn are displayed in pairs of two. The hex functions are auto- matically assigned to the numeric keys at the front panel.
  • Page 129 ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Editors Auxiliary functions are offered in the lower editor area, e.g. presetting for the ramps in the marker signal, cursor positioning by entering the bit position and possible editing by means of value entries in a table.
  • Page 130 ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Editors 3. Configure the control and marker signals (see "Handling of Ramps" on page 110). 4. Define length of control list ("Custom Dig Mod" only). Select the "Total List Length" entry field and press the ENTER key. Enter the length by means of the numeric keys and confirm the entry.

  • Page 131: How To Use The Help System

    ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A How to Use the Help System Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the ramp position; the cursor changes colour. Press the ENTER key. The cursor again changes colour. The ramp will now be shifted by means of the cursor.
  • Page 132 ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A How to Use the Help System Compiled online help systems are also available for all functions of the R&S SMU on the CD-ROM supplied with the instrument. This help program can be called on any controller with Internet Explorer version V4.0 and higher.

  • Page 133: File Management

    ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A File Management Using the Index 1. Select the "Go to Index" button. 2. Enter the first characters of the topic you are interested in. The entries starting with these characters are displayed. 3. Press the ENTER key to change the focus.
  • Page 134 ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A File Management ● Lists Lists, e.g. user correction lists, can be loaded. They can be generated either exter- nally or internally. For internal generation, a new list must be created in the "File Select" dialog which will then be edited in the list editor of the individual menu.

  • Page 135: File Select Dialog

    ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A File Management Saving and loading of all instrument settings All instrument settings are saved and loaded in the "File" menu. To access the "File" menu, press the FILE (CTRL+S) key. For more information, see chapter 5.2.8, "Storing and Loading Instrument Data - File Key", on page 156.

  • Page 136: File Manager

    ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A File Management Working with the File Select dialog 1. Access the "File Select" dialog (see "Accessing files with user data" on page 114). 2. Navigate in the "File Select" dialog. 3. Load an existing file.

  • Page 137: Extensions For User Files

    ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A File Management selected is displayed. Unlike the "File Select" window, the "File Manager" displays the full file names including extensions . Working with the File Manager dialog 1. Accessing the "File Manager" dialog (see "Accessing files with user data"...
  • Page 138 ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A File Management Function/Digital List type Contents File suffix Standard Control List Data to control digital modulation *.dm_iqc Settings Digital modulation settings *.dm User Standard Digital modulation user standard *.dm_stu User Mapping Digital modulation user mapping *.vam...

  • Page 139: Legend Of Front-Panel Controls

    ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Legend of Front-Panel Controls Function/Digital List type Contents File suffix Standard "GPS" Settings Complete setting of the GPS/A-GPS menu *.gps Settings GPS Almanac Settings *.txt *.alm *.al3 Settings GPS Waypoints File *.txt Settings GPS Generated Almanac File *rs_al *.rs_yuma...
  • Page 140 ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Legend of Front-Panel Controls Table 4-2: Cross-reference between the front panel keys and keyboard shortcuts Front-panel key Key of PC keyboard Function Turning the rotary knob Tab key (towards the right) Sets the cursor with the rotary knob.

  • Page 141: Front Panel Key Emulation

    ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Legend of Front-Panel Controls Front-panel key Key of PC keyboard Function MENU CTRL + M Calls the menu selection list. MOD ON/OFF CTRL + O Switches modulation on/off. "MOD OFF" is indicated in the status line.

  • Page 142: On-Screen Keyboard

    ® Manual Operation R&S SMU200A Legend of Front-Panel Controls 4.8.2 On-screen Keyboard In addition, the Windows XP operating system provides a keyboard emulation that can be used for system settings if no external keyboard but a mouse is available. To access the on-Screen Keyboard, select "Start > Programs > Accessories > Accessi- bility >...

  • Page 143: Instrument Function

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Overview of Instrument Functions 5 Instrument Function 5.1 Overview of Instrument Functions This chapter explains the functions of the R&S SMU and the options available in the setting menus. The associated SCPI command is specified for each parameter (where applicable).
  • Page 144 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Overview of Instrument Functions The integrated bit error rate and block error tester is configured and activated in the "BERT" function block: ● Bit error rate and block error measurement chapter 5.4, "Bit and Block Error Rate Measurements - BERT Block",...
  • Page 145 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Overview of Instrument Functions ● Multi Carrier CW signals chapter 5.8.5, "Multi Carrier Continuous Wave", on page 422 ● Digital standard GSM/EDGE see description "Digital Standard GSM/EDGE" ● Digital standard 3GPP FDD (WCDMA) see description "Digital Standard 3GPP FDD (WCDMA) ●...

  • Page 146: General Instrument Settings

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings 5.2 General Instrument Settings 5.2.1 Overview of General Instrument Settings This section describes the settings which do not directly affect signal generation. Most of these settings can only be accessed by means of menus which are opened using keys or key combinations on the external keyboard or keys on the front panel key emulation.

  • Page 147: General Configuration Of Instrument - Setup Key

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings ● "Modulations State" = Off ● Uninterrupted level setting are switch off "Level Attenuator Mode" = AUTO ● Internal level control "Level ALC" = AUTO ● User correction "Level Ucor" = OFF ●...

  • Page 148: Internal Adjustments

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings See also chapter 5.2.3.10, "Global Trigger/Clock/External Input Settings", on page 137. 5.2.3.1 Internal Adjustments The R&S Signal Generator is extremely accurate thanks to the integrated procedures for adjustments. All internal adjustments for which no external measuring equipment is needed can be started in the "Internal Adjustments..."...
  • Page 149 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings Adjust All Starts all internal adjustments for which no external measuring equipment is needed. The adjustments with external measuring equipment are described in the Service Manual (supplied). With two-path instruments, adjustment is performed for both paths.

  • Page 150: Hardware Config

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings Adjustment for only the set frequency is considerably faster than adjustment across the entire frequency range. This is possible with "Full Range". SCPI command: on page 525 :CALibration<hw>:IQModulator:LOCal Adjust I/Q Modulator Full Range Starts the adjustment for the I/Q modulator for the entire frequency range.

  • Page 151: Software / Options

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings Power On Count Displays the number of power-on. SCPI command: on page 529 :DIAGnostic:INFO:POCount Assembly The tables list the installed assemblies. "Path" Shows the path to which the assembly belongs. "Assembly" Assembly name "Part Number"...

  • Page 152: Gui Update

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings Firmware The Firmware section of the menu shows the firmware version and the version of the software platform. Note: Your instrument is delivered with the latest firmware version available. Firmware updates as well as the Release Notes describing the improvements and modifications are provided on the Internet at the download site of the Rohde &...

  • Page 153: Install Sw-Option

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings On/Off GUI Update Switchs on/off update of the displayed parameters. Switching off the update of the displayed parameters increases the speed for certain settings. Note: It is especially recommended to switch off the GUI update for optimum sweep performance with short dwell times and for fast settling times.

  • Page 154: Update

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings Current Sensors Section "Current Sensors" lists the sensors currently connected to the generator and indicates their serial number, the revision state and some features. SCPI command: n.a. Update Section "Update" provides access to the file system in order to select a file for an R&S NRP sensor update (Button "Select NRP File"), the selected file is indicated to the left of...

  • Page 155: Selftest

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings Impairment of instrument functions To avoid impairment of instrument functions, the update of the "PCI-FPGA" must not be cancelled and the instrument must not be switched off during this update. 5.2.3.8 Selftest A selftest is provided for service purposes.

  • Page 156: Check Front Panel

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings Execute BBIN A/B Selftest Performs a selftest on the baseband input hardware options. Several analog diagnostics points are checked to verify the correct function of the module. The result (succeeded or failed) is displayed in the status field next to the "Execute BBIN: x Selftest" button.

  • Page 157: Global Trigger/Clock/External Input Settings

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings 5.2.3.10 Global Trigger/Clock/External Input Settings The "Global Trigger/Clock/External Inputs" menu can be opened using the SETUP or MENU key under the "Setup" menu as well as in all clock and trigger menus of the "Baseband"...
  • Page 158 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings Threshold Data Input Sets the high/low threshold in volts for the serial and parallel data input. The serial data is input at the DATA connector of the instrument. The parallel data is input via the DATA pins of the AUX I/O interface.

  • Page 159: Display/Keyboard Settings

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings Baseband Trigger Input Slope Selects the polarity of the active slope of an externally applied trigger signal. This setting affects the TRIGGER inputs (BNC connectors). SCPI command: on page 721 [:SOURce]:INPut:TRIGger:BBANd:SLOPe Instrument Trigger Input Slope Sets the polarity of the active slope of an applied instrument trigger.

  • Page 160: User Marker / Aux I/O Settings

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings Screen Saver Active Activates/deactivates the screen-save mode of the display. If activated, the display including backlight is completely switched off after the elapse of the "Wait Time" when no entries via front panel, external mouse or external keyboard are made.
  • Page 161 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings Table 5-1: USER Connector Signals Signal Description "Marker 4" A broad selection of suitable marker signals is offered in the marker menus of the "Baseband" block. In addition, they can be freely config- ured in the "Custom Dig Mod >...
  • Page 162 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings Table 5-2: USER Connector Signals (Path B) Signal Description "Clock Out" output Path B; bit or symbol clock pulse This signal corresponds to the clock signal for digital modulations. The signal is generated automatically when the standard is switched on.
  • Page 163 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings AUX I/O Connector An illustration of the AUX I/O interface is shown. The inputs are indicated by a "depressed" pin , outputs by a non-depressed pin The assignment is shown in tabular form underneath the interface. The colors indicate the signal type.

  • Page 164: Remote Channel Settings

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings 5.2.3.13 Remote Channel Settings The "Remote Channel Settings" dialog provides access to the settings for remote control. The "Remote Channel Settings" dialog is opened using the SETUP or MENU key under "Remote".
  • Page 165 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings LAN Status The LED indicates the LXI status. The LAN Status is also indicated with the LED "LAN Status" on the front panel of the instrument. "green" normal operation "green (flash- device identification ing"...

  • Page 166: Protection

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings Parameter Negotiation Auto Detect VXI-11 Discovery Enabled The LAN settings are configured using the instrument's LXI Browser Interface described chapter 2.9, "LXI Configuration", on page 58. To open the "Instrument Home Page" (welcome page), type the instrument's computer name (host name) or IP address in the address field of the browser on your PC, e.g.
  • Page 167 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings A change of passwords for the operating system and security password requires the entry of the old and new password and the conformation of the new password. All settings are only accepted after the "Change Password" button is pressed.

  • Page 168: Save/Recall

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings The instrument does not recognize any device connected to the USB interface when the interface is disabled. The setting requires the entry of the security password and is only accepted after the "Accept"...

  • Page 169: Help

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings Factory Preset Reset the instrument's settings to their factory state. Note: Since Factory Preset resets the Remote Channel and network settings to the default values, executing Factory Preset via remote control terminates the connection to...

  • Page 170: Generating A Hard Copy Of The Display

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings The status message additionally indicates whether the LOCAL key is disabled or enabled (see also chapter 6.2.1, "Switching to Remote Control", on page 455). If the "REMOTE" status message is shown, the LOCAL key switches the instrument from remote control to manual control.

  • Page 171: Hardcopy Dialog

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings 5.2.5.1 Hardcopy Dialog Destination Selects if the hardcopy is printed or stored in a file (see also "Printer Options" on page 152 or "File Options" on page 153). SCPI command: on page 533...

  • Page 172: Hardcopy Options

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings 5.2.5.2 Hardcopy Options Printer Options Dialog for setting the printer parameters. "Printer" Selects a printer from a list of available printers. The name of the selected printer is indicated in the selection field. If the list is empty, no printer driver is installed.
  • Page 173 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings "Paper Size" Selects the size of the printer paper for the hardcopy. The currently selectable paper formats are "Letter", "Legal", "Executive", "A4" and "A5". For information on the paper format width and height values are indicated additionally.
  • Page 174 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings "Clear Path" Deletes all image files with extensions bmp, img, png, xpm and csv in the directory set for automatic naming. Before deleting the image files a warning message is displayed requiring the confirmation.

  • Page 175: Messages - Info Key

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings Print / Save Triggers the generation of a hardcopy. SCPI command: on page 534 :HCOPy[:EXECute] 5.2.6 Messages - Info Key The INFO key opens a window containing a detailed description of every message dis- played in the info bar, see chapter 4.2.3, "Info...

  • Page 176: Storing And Loading Instrument Data - File Key

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings The contents list is used to open the individual help pages. It has a hierarchical struc- ture. The highlighted line indicates where the currently displayed page is within the contents list. ●...

  • Page 177: File Menu

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings When loading an instrument setting, it is possible to select whether the current frequency and level setting is to be retained or whether the stored settings are to be activated. It is possible to delete stored instrument settings.
  • Page 178 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings Recent data sets Displays the files last used. The entire path is shown in plain text. SCPI command: n.a. Directory Selects the directory in which the file is to be stored. The window opposite lists all settings files in this directory.

  • Page 179: Loading Instrument Settings

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings These instrument settings are retained until a different instrument setting is stored in the intermediate memory. When the instrument is switched off, the contents of the inter- mediate memories are retained. SCPI command:...

  • Page 180: File Manager

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings File List Selects the file with the desired instrument configuration. SCPI command: on page 545 :MMEMory:CATalog Exclude Frequency The current frequency is retained when a stored instrument setting is loaded. SCPI command: on page 713 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency[:CW|:FIXed]:RCL...
  • Page 181 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A General Instrument Settings For more information, see chapter 4.7.2, "File Manager", on page 116. File Type Selects the file types to be indicated. If a file type with a specific file extension is selected only files with this extension are indicated in the selected directory.

  • Page 182: Graphical Display - Graphics

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Graphical Display - Graphics Rename Renames the selected file or directory. The new name can be entered in the "New File- name" dialog. SCPI command: on page 550 :MMEMory:MOVE Delete Deletes the selected file. Before the file is deleted, a message appears prompting the user to confirm deletion of the file.

  • Page 183: Graphics Settings Menu

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Graphical Display - Graphics such as a change in modulation mode, or the effects of certain configurations, e.g. the activation of several base stations in the case of (W)CDMA signals, can be analyzed directly in the display. Freezing the signal and then zooming permit a detailed evaluation of any signal segment.
  • Page 184 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Graphical Display - Graphics State Activates the selected graphical display. After activation, the diagram selected with "Mode" is displayed in the block diagram. At the bottom of each graphics window there are several buttons for freezing and zooming the display and for activating a reference curve.
  • Page 185 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Graphical Display - Graphics "Marker 1" The starting point for recording signals is determined by marker 1 in the menu of the active standard. This synchronous method is appropriate when specific signal segments are to be shown in greater detail. With periodic signals, a static image is obtained by selecting a period length of marker 1 that is equal to the signal period.

  • Page 186: Bar Of Graphics Window

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Graphical Display - Graphics 5.3.2 Bar of Graphics Window At the bottom of each graphics window there are buttons for freezing and zooming the display and for defining and activating a reference curve. Freezes the current display.
  • Page 187 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Graphical Display - Graphics Clicking the button again hides the reference curves. The reference curves must be defined beforehand using the "Copy to Ref" button. SCPI command: n.a. Copy to ref Defines the current curve as the reference curve.

  • Page 188: Signal Displays

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Graphical Display - Graphics "Delete" Deletes the curve highlighted in the display area. Curves which are no longer required can be deleted to reduce the num- ber of reference curves displayed simultaneously. "Assign" Defines the current curve as the reference curve.

  • Page 189: Vector Diagram

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Graphical Display - Graphics 5.3.3.2 Vector Diagram The Q component is displayed over the I component in the vector diagram. Each point is determined by a vector. The amplitudes of the signal components scaled to the peak envelope power (PEP) are plotted on the X and Y axis (minimum scaled amplitude = -1;...

  • Page 190: Constellation Diagram

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Graphical Display - Graphics 5.3.3.3 Constellation Diagram In the constellation diagram, the Q component is also displayed over the I component. However, only the values at the constellation points (signal value at the ideal scanning instant of the symbol) are displayed, i.e.

  • Page 191: Eye Diagram

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Graphical Display - Graphics 5.3.3.4 Eye Diagram The eye diagram displays synchronized and superimposed sections of either the inphase or quadrature components of the signal. The display width (eye length) is set at 2 symbols; several hundred curve segments are superimposed.

  • Page 192: Ccdf Display

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Graphical Display - Graphics 5.3.3.5 CCDF Display The Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function shows the probability with which the output signal will exceed the average power. The level over the average power is plotted from 0 to 20 dB on the X axis; the average power (RMS) corresponds to the origin.

  • Page 193: Power Spectrum

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Graphical Display - Graphics 5.3.3.6 Power Spectrum With the spectrum display, the signal spectrum is calculated from the I/Q signal by means of Fast Fourier Transform (FFT). The power density over frequency is displayed. The power density is plotted on the Y axis, and the frequency is plotted symmetrically on the X axis (-sampling rate/2 to +sam- pling rate/2).

  • Page 194: Bit And Block Error Rate Measurements - Bert Block

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Bit and Block Error Rate Measurements - BERT Block 5.4 Bit and Block Error Rate Measurements - BERT Block The R&S Signal Generator contains an integrated bit error rate tester which makes it possible to evaluate a signal demodulated and decoded by a DUT by measuring the bit error rate.

  • Page 195: Test Setup

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Bit and Block Error Rate Measurements - BERT Block The "BERT" interface is located on the rear panel. Besides the data and clock input, it provides further inputs for masking data containing the PRBS sequence. The interface description can be found in chapter 1.3, "BERT...

  • Page 196: Prbs Data

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Bit and Block Error Rate Measurements - BERT Block 5.4.2 PRBS data To be able to detect faulty bits by a BER measurement, the data generation polynomial must be known. PRBS sequences are therefore used as the method for computing the data (see chapter 5.8.2.1, "Internal PRBS Data and Data...

  • Page 197: Ending The Measurement

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Bit and Block Error Rate Measurements - BERT Block 5.4.5 Ending the measurement The measurement results usually lie in the range of 10-2 to 10-9 for the bit error rate, and in the range of 10 to 10 for the block error rate.

  • Page 198: Data Enable

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Bit and Block Error Rate Measurements - BERT Block Fig. 5-2: The length of the signal is too short for a complete PRBS sequence; PRBS generation is restarted by the Restart signal when the signal begins anew.

  • Page 199: Pattern Ignore

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Bit and Block Error Rate Measurements - BERT Block Fig. 5-5: Data Enable signal with block error rate measurement. 5.4.9 Pattern Ignore Bit sequences of 32 bits or more with only "1" or "0", which some mobile radio standards provide instead of frame data when faulty frames are detected, can also be excluded from the measurement using the "Pattern Ignore"...

  • Page 200: General Settings

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Bit and Block Error Rate Measurements - BERT Block If the data is not cyclically continued, the measurement can be selectively interrupted and restarted. Certain data sections and frames that have been marked as faulty can be excluded from the measurement.
  • Page 201 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Bit and Block Error Rate Measurements - BERT Block Data Bits Displays the current number of data bits checked. SCPI command: on page 514 :BERT:RESult Data Bits Displays the current number of data bits checked.
  • Page 202 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Bit and Block Error Rate Measurements - BERT Block "No Clock" The applied clock signal was not detected. Possible causes are: ● Clock recovery is not available (e.g. with tests of RF components). If the signal is generated using the R&S Signal Generator, the bit clock can be extracted from the CLOCK output connector (only with "Custom Dig Mod"...

  • Page 203: Configuration

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Bit and Block Error Rate Measurements - BERT Block "No Sync" The measurement is not synchronized. Generally, a measurement cannot be synchronized until a clock and a data signal have been detected. If synchronization still does not occur, this may be caused by the following: ●...
  • Page 204 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Bit and Block Error Rate Measurements - BERT Block "Auto" Continuous measurement of bit error rate. If either or both of the termination criteria are met, the measurement in progress is terminated and immediately a new one is started automati- cally.
  • Page 205 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Bit and Block Error Rate Measurements - BERT Block Note: Standard-compliant data inversion for PRBS15 and PRBS23 is performed auto- matically when the PRBS is selected. "Data Polarity" remains unaffected. SCPI command: on page 520...
  • Page 206 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Bit and Block Error Rate Measurements - BERT Block The length of the signal is too short for a complete PRBS sequence; PRBS generation is restarted by the "Restart" signal when the signal begins anew.
  • Page 207 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Bit and Block Error Rate Measurements - BERT Block ment wait as long as data is not enabled. If the data is enabled, the measurement is continued. The figure shows a TDMA signal with user data that contains the PRBS data sequence and various check fields which should be ignored for the bit error rate measurement.

  • Page 208: Block Error Rate Menu

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Bit and Block Error Rate Measurements - BERT Block Example: 50 bits were set to "0" by the DUT. These 50 bits plus the preceding "0" are ignored in the bit error rate measurement. "Off"...

  • Page 209: General Settings

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Bit and Block Error Rate Measurements - BERT Block 5.4.11.1 General Settings State Switches the block error rate measurement on/off. Depending on the setting in the "Mode" box, either a continuous measurement ("Auto") or a single measurement ("Single") is carried out. A single measurement must be started by clicking the "Execute Single"...
  • Page 210 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Bit and Block Error Rate Measurements - BERT Block Errors Displays the current number of occurred errors. SCPI command: on page 513 :BLER:RESult Terminated By Displays the termination criterion for the measurement. These criteria can be entered to keep the duration of the measurement short for low as well as high block error rates.

  • Page 211: Configuration

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Bit and Block Error Rate Measurements - BERT Block "Data" The applied data signal was detected. "No Data" The applied data signal was not detected. Possible causes are: ● The signal from the DUT is missing.
  • Page 212 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Bit and Block Error Rate Measurements - BERT Block "Single" Single measurement of bit error rate. The measurement is started by clicking the "Execute Single" button. If a measurement is in progress, the current values for "Block Error Rate", "Errors"...
  • Page 213 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Bit and Block Error Rate Measurements - BERT Block Data Polarity Sets the polarity of the feedback data blocks. SCPI command: on page 517 :BLER:SETup:DATA[:POLarity] Clock Slope Sets the polarity of the active slope of the feedback clock.

  • Page 214: Rf Signal And Analog Modulations - Rf Block

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block 5.5 RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block 5.5.1 Overview of RF Signal Settings for the RF output signal and analog modulation are made under "RF Signal" and "Analog Modulations".

  • Page 215: Overview Of The Rf Signal Settings

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block To query the impedance of the RF outputs, use the com- mand on page 555. :OUTPut<hw>:IMPedance State RF Activated/deactivates the RF output by changing the state of the "RF" functional block.

  • Page 216: Rf Frequency Settings

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block In case of two-path instrument, both paths are triggered separately. The BNC connector INST TRIG is assigned to Path A, and the pin INST TRIG B of the AUX I/O interface is assigned to Path B.

  • Page 217: Configuring Rf Frequency

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block 5.5.2.2 Configuring RF frequency To change the RF frequency, press the FREQ key and enter the desired frequency. Changes to the RF frequency have an immediate effect (without confirmation with the Enter key) on the output signal.
  • Page 218 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block The phase of the output signal can be changed in the "Phase Settings" section. The "Phase Settings" menu is described in chapter 5.5.3, "Phase Settings", on page 199.

  • Page 219: Phase Settings

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block Variation Step - RF Signal Sets the user-defined step width. This step width is used when entering the RF frequency using the rotary knob. Frequency variation with this step width must also be activated with "Variation Active".

  • Page 220: Phase Continuous Frequency Setting

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block 5.5.3.2 Phase Continuous Frequency Setting The phase continuous mode can be enabled in the "Phase Continuous Frequency Set- tings" section of the "Frequency" menu. In this mode, the output sinewave is phase con- tinuous, i.e.
  • Page 221 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block Fig. 5-8: Transition for a 1 kHz step at 1 GHz with phase continuous mode active. For the graphical display the signal is down converted into the kHz range.
  • Page 222 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block If "Frequency Range" in Narrow Mode does not, select “Wide” for the Frequency Range and check the Phase Continuous Active box 3. In the "RF Frequency Sweep" dialog a) Modify the "Start Freq"...
  • Page 223 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block Note: If "Phase Continuous" is "Active" a setting of the "RF Frequency" outside the indi- cated "Frequency Range" is only possible for mode Wide. A settings conflict is displayed.

  • Page 224: Reference Oscillator

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block "Wide" The wide mode provides a larger frequency range. The frequency range is symmetrical around the RF frequency set at the point of activating the phase continuous settings (see table above).
  • Page 225 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block The reference oscillator is set in the lower area of the group menu "Frequency/Phase". The upper areas are for setting the frequency and phase of the RF output signal. For more information, see chapter 5.5.2.3, "Frequency...

  • Page 226: Local Oscillator - Lo Coupling

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block Selects the synchronization bandwidth for an external reference signal. The wideband setting is provided for using very good reference sources of high spectral purity. "Narrow" Synchronization bandwidth is 1 Hz.

  • Page 227: Typical Applications

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block If two signal generators are coupled via their 10 MHz reference, they are generating exactly the same frequency but only from the long term perspective. Having a closer look into the instantaneous differential phase (“delta phase”) of these two RF signals, this is...

  • Page 228: Lo Coupling Menu

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block ● Generation of 4xN MIMO signal with two R&S Signal Generators, R&S Signal Gen- erator 1 working in Coupled A->B mode and R&S Signal Generator 2 working in External Coupled A->B mode.
  • Page 229 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block "External" An external signal is used. In case of a two-path instrument, the internal local oscillator signal is used for path B. Note: Selection of LO Coupling "External" mode, disables all parameters in the "Frequency/Phase/Ref Osc"...

  • Page 230: Nrp-Z Power Viewer

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block "External Cou- (the parameter is enabled for two-path instruments only) pled A -> B" An external signal is input on the LO IN connector and used for the cou- pled paths A and B (see also chapter 5.5.5.2, "Typical...

  • Page 231: Nrp-Z Power Viewer Menu

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block The output signals of the two RF signal paths (reference level is the set RF level) or any freely selectable source can be measured. The signal generator supports the use of R&S NRP power sensors for the acquisition of level correction data.
  • Page 232 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block The sensor is selected by suffix 1, 2 or 3 in key word SENSe or READ of the command header. Suffix 1 denotes the sensor connected to the SENSOR connector, suffix 2 the sensor connected first to one of the USB interfaces and suffix 3 the sensor connected second to one of the USB interfaces.
  • Page 233 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block Unit - Power Sensors Selects the unit used for result display. The power sensor provides the measured value in Watt. In which unit the measured value is indicated is selected here and might be Watt, dBm or dBuV.
  • Page 234 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block Source - Power Sensors Selects the source for measurement. "RF" Measurement source is the RF signal of the generator. The RF frequency is used as the measurement frequency of the sensor and the corre- sponding correction factor is used.
  • Page 235 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block The filter length can be selected automatically or can be manually set to a fixed value. As a preliminary, you should always check if the auto mode is giving satisfactory results because you will always have to adjust an optimal, manual filter-length setting if the power is not constant.

  • Page 236: Rf Level/Emf

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block Target Level - Power Sensors Sets the targer RF level. SCPI command: n.a. 5.5.7 RF Level/EMF 5.5.7.1 Overview RF Level Settings Message "Level overrange/underrange" If this message appears in the status line, the following parameter is in the overrange (see data sheet): ●...

  • Page 237: Rf Level

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block level offset the level displayed in the header does not correspond to the level at the RF output, but rather to the level at the output of the downstream instrument.
  • Page 238 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block the menu. The attenuator mode is set in the "Attenuator Settings" section. The step width which is used when setting the level using the rotary knob (with "Variation Active On") is set in the "User Variation"...
  • Page 239 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block The value is not affected by an instrument preset (PRESET key), *RST and the "Save/ Recall" function. This parameter is influenced only by the Factory Preset and its factory value is equal to the upper limit.

  • Page 240: Power-On/Emf Settings

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block "Fixed" The level settings are made without switching the attenuator and the relays. When this operating mode is switched on, the attenuator and the relays are fixed in their current positions and the resulting variation range is defined.

  • Page 241: Automatic Level Control - Alc

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block To open the "RF Level/EMF" dialog, select "RF/A Mod > Configure > Level/EMF" or use the MENU key under "RF/A Mod". Power-On State - RF Signal Selects the state which the RF output is to assume after the instrument is switched on.

  • Page 242: Automatic Level Control Menu

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block Automatic Level Control is deactivated with pulse modulation! When pulse modulation is activated, the ALC state of the R&S SMU is automatically changed to "ALC OFF" ("Sample & Hold"). In this state, the ALC loop is opened and the output level is not regulated but the level modulator is set directly.

  • Page 243: User Correction

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block The level is decreased by 30 dB during "Sample&Hold" measurement. "Off (Sample & Internal level control is deactivated. Hold)" "Auto" Default state. Level control is automatically adapted to the operating states.

  • Page 244: Multi Level Measurements Allow To Take Into Account The Changing Vswr For The Different

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block Correction list with the correction values acquired by the sensor is generated in the "Edit User Correction List" menu. The correction values can be acquired any time irrespective of the modulation settings of the generator.
  • Page 245 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block Use Multi Level Correction - User Correction Activates the use of the multi level correction data (see chapter 5.5.9.3, "Filling the Cor- rection List with Power Sensor Measurement Data", on page 230) if checked.
  • Page 246 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block "Frequency / Enters the frequency to which the level correction value applies. Hz" Note: The "Fill..." function allows to automatically enter any number of frequencies with freely selectable range and increment.
  • Page 247 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block "Insert Range" Insert new rows before the marked row. The number of rows to be inser- ted can be defined in an entry window. "Fill.." Opens a sub menu for defining a set of list values to be automatically entered in the ucor list (see chapter 5.5.9.2, "Filling the Correction List...
  • Page 248 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block Mode - User Correction Selects if user correction lists should be imported or exported. The settings offered depend on the selected mode. SCPI command: on page 705 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:MODE...

  • Page 249: Filling The Correction List Automatically

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block Destination / Source - User Correction Calls the "File Manager" for selecting the user correction list to be exported (source) into an ASCII file or the destination for the ASCII file to be imported (destination) in.

  • Page 250: Filling The Correction List With Power Sensor Measurement Data

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block Range Sets the range for filling the table. SCPI command: n.a. Select column to fill Selects either the frequency or the level column to be filled with the value defined below.
  • Page 251 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block All level correction values for the given frequency values are measured using the Power Sensor and automatically filled in the selected list after the "Execute" button is pressed.

  • Page 252: Overvoltage Protection

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block The Multi Level Correction measurements are made in addition to a Single Level Cor- rection measurement. When the user correction list is activated, it is possible to select which of the measurements is to be used for level correction.

  • Page 253: Analog Modulations

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block 5.5.11 Analog Modulations 5.5.11.1 Overview The R&S Signal Generator provides the analog modulations amplitude modulation (AM), broadband amplitude modulation (BB-AM) and pulse modulation (Pulse) for the basic unit (R&S SMU+ frequency option R&S SMU-B10x) without additional equipment options.

  • Page 254: Amplitude Modulation (Am)

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block See also chapter 5.5.12.1, "LF Generator Overview", on page 246. External Modulation Sources The EXT MOD input at the rear of the instrument is provided as the external modulation source for amplitude, pulse, frequency and phase modulation.
  • Page 255 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block The AM modulation depth is limited by the maximum peak envelope power (PEP). Amplitude Modulation Menu To open the "Amplitude Modulation" menu, select "RF/A Mod > Configure > Amplitude Modulation"...
  • Page 256 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block "Intern + Selects the internal and external source at the same time. This setting Extern" enables two-tone AM modulation. SCPI command: on page 569 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:SOURce AM Depth Sets the modulation depth in percent.

  • Page 257: Broadband Amplitude Modulation (Bb-Am)

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block Note: This setting affects all analog modulations which use the external modulation source. SCPI command: on page 721 [:SOURce<hw>]:INPut:MODext:IMPedance 5.5.11.3 Broadband Amplitude Modulation (BB-AM) With broadband amplitude modulation the I/Q modulator is used for amplitude modula- tion.

  • Page 258: Frequency Modulation (Fm)

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block State Activates/deactivates broadband AM modulation. Activation of broadband AM deacti- vates AM, I/Q modulation, digital modulation and digital standards. SCPI command: on page 567 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:BBANd[:STATe] AM Sensitivity Displays the input sensitivity of the I IN input in V/100% modulation depth.
  • Page 259 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block The top section of the combined menu "Frequency/Phase Modulation" provides access to the frequency modulation settings. The the lower section of the combined menu provides access to phase modulation, see chapter 5.5.11.5, "Phase Modulation...
  • Page 260 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block "Low Noise" (requires option R&S Signal Generator-B22) Frequency modulation with phase noise and spurious characteristics close to CW mode. The range for modulation bandwidth and FM devia- tion is reduced (see data sheet).

  • Page 261: Phase Modulation (Phim)

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block FM External Coupling (Source External only) Selects the coupling mode (AC or DC) for external feed. Note: Coupling for external feed via input EXT MOD can be set independently for mod- ulations AM, FM and PhiM.
  • Page 262 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block Phase Modulation Menu To open the "Phase Modulation" menu, select "RF/A Mod > Configure > Phase Modula- tion" or use the MENU key under "RF/A Mod". The lower section of the combined menu Frequency/Phase Modulation provides access to the phase modulation settings.
  • Page 263 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block "High Band- The maximum range for modulation bandwidth is available. However, width" phase noise is increased for low frequencies. The range for PhiM devi- ation is limited.

  • Page 264: Pulse Modulation (Pm)

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block Note: Coupling for external feed via input EXT MOD can be set independently for mod- ulations AM, FM and PHIM. "AC" The d.c. voltage content is separated from the modulation signal.
  • Page 265 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block In the upper section of the menu, the modulation source is selected and the modulation switched on. The configuration of the selected external and/or internal modulation source is performed in the lower section of the menu.

  • Page 266: Lf Generator And Lf Output - Mod Gen

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block Polarity (External Source only) Selects the polarity of the modulation signal. "Normal" The RF signal is On while the level is high at the modulation input. "Inverted"...

  • Page 267: Sweep Mode

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block The modulation signal is output at the LF OUTPUT connector at the rear of the instru- ments. SCPI command: on page 742 [:SOURce]:LFOutput[:STATe] Output Voltage - LF Output Sets the output voltage of the LF output.

  • Page 268: Rf Frequency Sweep

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block It is recommended to switch off the GUI update for optimum sweep performance espe- cially with short dwell times (see chapter 5.2.3.4, "Gui Update", on page 132).
  • Page 269 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block Note: Activating the RF sweep automatically deactivates the list mode, level sweep and LF sweep. In case of two-path instrument, this affects the respective path. SCPI command: on page 714 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MODE...
  • Page 270 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block "Step" Sets a step-by-step sweep cycle. If this mode is activated, the cursor moves to the value displayed for "Current Freq". Any variation to the "Current Freq" value triggers a sweep step.
  • Page 271 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block "Extern Step" Sets a step-by-step sweep cycle. Each sweep step is triggered by an external trigger signal (trigger source as described under "Extern Sin- gle"). The step width is set below at entry field "Step Lin" or "Step Log".
  • Page 272 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block Reset Sweep - Frequency Sweep Resets the sweep. The start frequency is set and the next sweep starts from there. SCPI command: on page 784 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:RESet[:ALL] Start Freq - Frequency Sweep Sets the start frequency.
  • Page 273 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block "Sawtooth" One sweep runs from start to stop frequency. Each subsequent sweep starts at the start frequency, i.e. the shape of the sweep sequence resembles a sawtooth.

  • Page 274: Rf Level Sweep

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block The "Dwell Time" set by the user is used as the step time of the sweep. The effective net dwell time is shorter, reduced by the setting time. This setting time may be greater than the time specified in the data sheet.
  • Page 275 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block In the top section, the Level Sweep mode is activated and the sweep mode is selected. The buttons are used to reset the level sweep (all sweep modes) or to execute the level sweep ("Single"...
  • Page 276 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block "Single" Sets a single sweep cycle. The sweep is triggered by the "Execute Single Sweep" button. If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the "Single" mode, the current sweep is stopped.
  • Page 277 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block "Extern Single" Sets a single sweep cycle. The sweep is triggered by an external trigger signal. If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the "Extern Single" mode, the current sweep is stopped.
  • Page 278 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block "Extern Start/ Sets an automaticly repeated sweep cycle that is started, stopped and Stop" restartet by subsequent external trigger events. The first external trigger signal starts the sweep (Start).
  • Page 279 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block If "Step" is set, the level for the next level step of the sweep is entered here. SCPI command: on page 768 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:MANual Shape - RF Level Sweep Selects the cycle mode for a sweep sequence (shape) .
  • Page 280 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block The "Dwell Time" set by the user is used as the step time of the sweep. The effective net dwell time is shorter, reduced by the setting time. This setting time may be greater than the time specified in the data sheet.

  • Page 281: Lf Frequency Sweep

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block 5.5.13.4 LF Frequency Sweep To open the "LF Frequency Sweep" menu, select "RF/A Mod > Configure > LF Frequency Sweep" or use the MENU key under "RF/A Mod".
  • Page 282 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block "Auto" Sets are automatic repeated sweep cycle. If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the "Auto" mode, the cycle continues from the current sweep setting.
  • Page 283 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block "Extern Single" Sets a single sweep cycle. The sweep is triggered by an external trigger signal. If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the "Extern Single" mode, the current sweep is stopped.
  • Page 284 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block "Extern Start/ Sets an automaticly repeated sweep cycle that is started, stopped and Stop" restartet by subsequent external trigger events. The first external trigger signal starts the sweep (Start).
  • Page 285 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block If Step is set, the frequency for the next frequency step of the sweep is entered here. SCPI command: on page 740 [:SOURce]:LFOutput:FREQuency:MANual Spacing - LF Sweep Selects linear or logarithmic sweep spacing.

  • Page 286: List Mode

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block The "Dwell Time" set by the user is used as the step time of the sweep. The effective net dwell time is shorter, reduced by the setting time. This setting time may be greater than the time specified in the data sheet.

  • Page 287: List Mode Dialog

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block List mode and sweeps can not be activated simultaneously, they deactivate each other. The lists can be created in the "List Editor". Each list is stored in its own file with the predefined file extension *.
  • Page 288 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block General Settings State - List Mode Activates/deactivates the List mode. The currently selected list is processed. In case of a new or modified list, the necessary hardware settings are automatically determined on activation of the list mode.
  • Page 289 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block "Single" Single cycle from the beginning to the end of the list. If "Single" is selected, the cycle is not started immediately. The "Execute Single" but- ton appears under the "Mode" line. The cycle is started with this button.
  • Page 290 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block In list operating modes Step and Extern Step, the set dwell time does not affect signal generation. In this case, the duration of a list step is determined by the time between two (internal or external) trigger events.
  • Page 291 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block SCPI command: on page 758 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:SELect on page 749 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DELete on page 749 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DELete:ALL Edit List Mode Data... - List Mode Calls the editor for editing the selected list. A list consists of any number of frequency/ level value pairs.
  • Page 292 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block "Insert Range" Inserts new rows before the marked row. The number of rows to be inserted can be defined in an entry window. "Fill.." Opens a sub menu for defining a set of list values to be automatically entered in the List Mode table (see chapter 5.5.14.2, "Filling the List...
  • Page 293 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block Import/Export Lists can be imported from externally created files or exported into text or CSV-files. The import/export settings are available after clicking the "Import/Export" button. Import/Export - List Mode Expands the menu with the area for import and export of list mode files.

  • Page 294: Filling The List Mode Data Automatically

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A RF Signal and Analog Modulations - RF Block Select ASCII Source / Destination - List Mode Calls the "File Manager" for selecting the ASCII file to be imported into a list mode list (source) or the ASCII file the list mode list is exported (destination) in.

  • Page 295: I/Q Modulation - I/Q Mod Block

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A I/Q Modulation - I/Q Mod Block From Sets the start value of the index range. SCPI command: n.a. Range Sets the range for filling the table. SCPI command: n.a. Select column to fill Selects either the frequency or the level column to be filled with the value defined below.
  • Page 296 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A I/Q Modulation - I/Q Mod Block Either the external analog signal (Path A only) or the externally or internally generated baseband signal (Path A and B) is fed into the I/Q modulator ("I/Q Mod A/B" function block).

  • Page 297: I/Q Modulator

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A I/Q Modulation - I/Q Mod Block (in the Impairment block in the Impairment menu) and analog in the I/Q modulator. If impairments are set in both menus, they superimpose each other in the signal. 5.6.1 I/Q Modulator To select the input signal of the I/Q modulator and to open the "I/Q Settings"...

  • Page 298: General I/Q Mod Settings

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A I/Q Modulation - I/Q Mod Block I/Q modulation is activated and the source entered in the top section of the menu. I/Q impairment for specific impairment of the I/Q modulation is set in the "Impairments"...

  • Page 299: Impairements

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A I/Q Modulation - I/Q Mod Block State - I/Q Mod Activates/deactivates I/Q modulation. If "Analog Wideband I/Q In" is selected, the I/Q modulator is also deactivated and acti- vated. If "Internal Baseband I/Q In" is selected, the I/Q modulator is always activated automat- ically as soon as signal generation is activated in the "Baseband"...
  • Page 300 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A I/Q Modulation - I/Q Mod Block Fig. 5-9: Effect of offset for the I component Fig. 5-10: Effect of offset for the Q component Operating Manual 1007.9845.32 ─ 15...
  • Page 301 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A I/Q Modulation - I/Q Mod Block Fig. 5-11: Effect of an identical offset for both signal components SCPI command: on page 724 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:IMPairment:LEAKage:I on page 725 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:IMPairment:LEAKage:Q Gain Imbalance - I/Q Mod Sets the imbalance of the I and Q vector.
  • Page 302 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A I/Q Modulation - I/Q Mod Block Fig. 5-12: Effect of a positive gain imbalance Negative values mean that the I vector is amplified more than the Q vector by the corre- sponding percentage: Operating Manual 1007.9845.32 ─ 15...
  • Page 303 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A I/Q Modulation - I/Q Mod Block Fig. 5-13: Effect of a negative gain imbalance SCPI command: on page 724 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:IMPairment:IQRatio[:MAGNitude] Quadrature Offset - I/Q Mod Sets the quadrature offset. An ideal I/Q modulator sets the phase angle to exactly 90 degrees. With a quadrature offset, the phase angle between the I and Q vector deviates from the ideal 90 degrees, the amplitudes of both components are of the same size.
  • Page 304 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A I/Q Modulation - I/Q Mod Block Fig. 5-14: Effect of a positive quadrature offset A negative quadrature offset means a phase angle less than 90 degrees: Operating Manual 1007.9845.32 ─ 15...

  • Page 305: I/Q Swap And I/Q Wideband

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A I/Q Modulation - I/Q Mod Block Fig. 5-15: Effect of a negative quadrature offset SCPI command: on page 725 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:IMPairment:QUADrature:[ANGLe] 5.6.2.3 I/Q Swap and I/Q Wideband The I/Q control can be swapped and the optimized setting for wideband signals can be selected in the middle section of the menu.

  • Page 306: Analog Wideband I/Q Input

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A I/Q Modulation - I/Q Mod Block Fig. 5-16: Definition of I/Q modulator in IS2000 and R&S Signal Generator f According to IS2000, the RF signal s(t) is derived from the baseband I/Q signal as follows:...
  • Page 307 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A I/Q Modulation - I/Q Mod Block The crest factor gives the difference in level between the peak envelope power (PEP) and average power value (RMS) in dB. This value is necessary to allow the correct output power to be generated at the RF output.

  • Page 308: Impairment Of Digital I/Q Signal And Noise Generator - Awgn/Imp Block

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block 5.7 Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block The R&S SMU allows the digital I/Q signal to be impaired before it is passed on to the I/ Q modulator, and also noise to be added to the signal.

  • Page 309: Impairments

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block "Info..." opens a dialog, displaying information on the baseband signal level. The single ended or differential output requires option R&S SMU-B16, Differential Output. 5.7.1 Impairments Impairment of the digital I/Q signal can be used, for example, to compensate the distortion of a test object or to check the effect of a disturbed signal on a test object.
  • Page 310 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block "Internal compensation" of signal distortions of the RF output can be activated / deacti- vated. Correction Files for user defined correction of the RF output, supported by the R&S SMU RF and Baseband Correction Toolkit (option R&S SMU-K63) can be loaded in the...
  • Page 311 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block Internal predistortion for compensating the I/Q modulator is not influenced by this setting. SCPI command: on page 667 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:STATe I/Q Offset - Digital Impairments Sets the carrier leakage (in percent) of the amplitudes (scaled to the peak envelope power (PEP)) for the I and/or Q signal component.
  • Page 312 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block Fig. 5-18: Effect of offset for the Q component Operating Manual 1007.9845.32 ─ 15...
  • Page 313 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block Fig. 5-19: Effect of an identical offset for both signal components SCPI command: on page 660 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:LEAKage:I on page 660 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:LEAKage:Q Gain Imbalance - Digital Impairments Sets the imbalance of the I and Q vector.
  • Page 314 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block Fig. 5-20: Effect of a positive gain imbalance Negative values mean that the I vector is amplified more than the Q vector by the corre- sponding percentage: Operating Manual 1007.9845.32 ─...
  • Page 315 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block Fig. 5-21: Effect of a negative gain imbalance SCPI command: on page 660 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:IQRatio Quadrature Offset - Digital Impairments Sets the quadrature offset. An ideal I/Q modulator sets the phase angle to exactly 90 degrees. With a quadrature offset, the phase angle between the I and Q vector deviates from the ideal 90 degrees, the amplitudes of both components are of the same size.
  • Page 316 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block Fig. 5-22: Effect of a positive quadrature offset A negative quadrature offset means a phase angle less than 90 degrees: Operating Manual 1007.9845.32 ─ 15...
  • Page 317 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block Fig. 5-23: Effect of a negative quadrature offset SCPI command: on page 667 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:QUADrature[:ANGLe] Internal Compensation "Internal compensation" of signal distortions "of the RF output "can be activated / deac- tivated.
  • Page 318 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block "User Correc- Note: User correction can be operated if the instrument is equipped with tion" an R&S SMU-K63. Optimization is reached by data generated with the R&S SMU RF and Baseband Correction Toolkit.
  • Page 319 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block Correction File Info - I/Q Impairments (Digital Baseband) Displays the most important header information on the loaded frequency response cor- rection file. Displays the type of the baseband frequency response correction data.

  • Page 320: Awgn - Noise Generator

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block "External Devi- Set to On the parameters bandwidth, frequency offset and level offset ces" are indicated below. SCPI command: [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:OPTimization:UCORrection:EDEVices on page 662 "Bandwidth"...

  • Page 321: Awgn Settings Dialog

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block Scalable low-pass filters are used to produce a noise level with both a broad dynamic range and a broad bandwidth range (from 1 kHz to 60 MHz).
  • Page 322 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block "Noise Only" The pure AWGN noise signal with selectable system bandwidth is modu- lated to the carrier. The connection to the baseband is interrupted.
  • Page 323 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block Selects the display of output results for the analog (DACIF) or the digital (BBOUT) signal path. Note: This selection field is only available with the option R&S SMU-B18, Baseband Digital I/Q Out.
  • Page 324 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block "E " The noise level is set on the basis of the value entered for the ratio of bit energy to noise power density.
  • Page 325 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block Sets the carrier/noise, signal/noise or signal/inerferer ratio. Whether a configuration of C/N or S/N is enabled, depends on the selected "Display Mode". ● In "Carrier Reference Mode", this entry determines the RFI power and thus the power of the output signal.
  • Page 326 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block ● In "Noise Reference Mode", this parameter indicates the carrier level which is derived from the entered C/N or S/N value. This indication corresponds to the level indicated in the "Level"...
  • Page 327 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block SCPI command: on page 576 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:POWer:NOISe Noise Level (Total Bandwidth) - AWGN Displays the level of the noise signal in the total bandwidth in "Noise Only" and "Additive Noise"...

  • Page 328: Output Of The Baseband Signal - I/Q Out

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block 5.7.3 Output of the Baseband Signal - I/Q Out The R&S Signal Generator provides various outputs of the baseband signal. The digitally modulated signal can either be output directly or converted to an analog I/ Q baseband output signal.

  • Page 329: Analog I/Q Output

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block In case of two-path instruments, the analog I/Q output signal can be assigned either to path A or path B. The settings for the digital I/Q output signal are available for path A only.
  • Page 330 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block Optimize IQ-Signals for RF Output Activates/deactivates optimization of level accuracy and imbalance for RF Output. Level accuracy and imbalance can be either optimized for RF output (active) or for dif- ferential outputs (not active).
  • Page 331 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block "Differential" Differential output at I OUT and I OUT BAR or Q OUT and Q OUT BAR. The analog I/Q signal components are output at I/Q OUT and I/Q OUT BAR.
  • Page 332 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block I/Q Level Vp EMF Sets the output voltage for both signal components. Small differences at the inputs can be taken into account via impairment settings (see chapter 5.7.1.1, "Impairment Settings...

  • Page 333: Digital I/Q Output Settings

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block For example, if a 100.0 mV offset value is set for the I signal component, the output signal at "I OUT" will have a 50.0 mV offset and the output signal at "I OUT Bar" will have a -50.0mV offset.
  • Page 334 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block If an "R&S EX-IQ-Box" is connected the R&S SMU recognizes this module automatically. Then, the button "EX-I/Q-Box Settings..." is displayed in the "Digital I/Q Output Set- tings"...
  • Page 335 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block Sample Rate In the "Sample Rate" section the sample rate for the digital I/Q output signal can be set and the state of signal transmission is indicated by the FIFO Status.
  • Page 336 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block "PEP" The signal level is expressed in terms of a peak envelope power value (PEP). The level entry fields and the corresponding units are displayed in the status bar.

  • Page 337: I/Q Level - Info

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block Signal Monitoring The section "Signal Monitoring" indicates digital signal clipping. Overflow - Digital I/Q Out Indicates that the I/Q output signal is currently clipped. This indication also appears in the block diagram close to the digital I/Q Out connector.

  • Page 338: Baseband Signal Level

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block This information is needed by the user, for example, in order to use the I/Q signal exter- nally and to adjust the level correctly there, or to see how the signal is modulated.

  • Page 339: Baseband Signal Level Measurement

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block Crest[dB]=Peak_Level[dBFs]/Signal_Level[dBFs] SCPI command: on page 689 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:CFACtor Peak Level - Digital Impairments Indicates the peak level of the baseband signal relative to full scale of 0.5 V (in terms of dB full scale).
  • Page 340 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Impairment of Digital I/Q Signal and Noise Generator - AWGN/IMP Block "Baseband w/o Activates the measurement of the interference-free baseband signal. AWGN" "Baseband with Activates the measurement of the baseband signal after an AWGN noise AWGN"...

  • Page 341: Baseband Signal - Baseband Block

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block While working in a 4x2 or 3x2 MIMO mode that requires two two-path R&S Signal Gen- erators, the MIMO Fading Power Correction for path A of both instruments is identical and respectively this correction coefficient is identical for both B paths.

  • Page 342: Working With The Baseband Signal

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block (see data sheet). Apart from the memory size, however, the options offer the same func- tionality, either one can be installed. In addition, the appropriate option is required for the digital standards. These options are specified in the description of the respective standard.
  • Page 343 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block The complex I/Q bandwidth of the shifted useful signal must not exceed 80 MHz in total. The following applies: /2 >= - 80MHz/2 and f /2 <= + 80MHz/2 offset offset = the complex useful bandwidth of the I/Q signal before the offset.
  • Page 344 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Example: Fig. 5-25: 3GPP FDD signal (chip rate 3.84 Mcps, root-cosine filter 0.22). The complex useful bandwidth of a signal which has been filtered using a root-cosine filter with roll off alpha is calculated as follows:...
  • Page 345 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Path Gain Enters the path gain for the baseband signal of the selected path compared to the base- band signal of the other path. In case an external baseband input ("BB Input") is used, this parameter also determines the path gain for the baseband signal of the selected path compared to the baseband signal of this external data source.
  • Page 346 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Table 5-3: Combinations of signal routings for two-path instruments Routing Baseband A Routing Baseband B Block diagram Route Route to path A to path A Route Route to path A...

  • Page 347: Data And Signal Sources In Baseband

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block "Route to path The baseband signal is introduced into path A. The signals from both A" paths are summed if necessary. "Route to path The baseband signal is introduced into path B. The signals from both B"...

  • Page 348: Internal Prbs Data And Data Patterns

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block 5.8.2.1 Internal PRBS Data and Data Patterns PRBS generators deliver pseudo-random binary sequences of differing length and dura- tion. They are known as maximum length sequences, and are generated with the aid of ring shift registers with feedback points determined by the polynomial.

  • Page 349: External Synchronous Modulation Data

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block The file name can be defined by the user. The "Data Source" selection from the menus is "Data List". When this menu item is chosen the "Select Data List" button appears; this opens the file-selection window for data lists.

  • Page 350: Clock Signals

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block In the case of modulation modes with fewer than 10bits/symbol, the data must be applied LSB-justified. In the case of 8-PSK modulation for example (3bits/symbol) only data lines D0, D1 and D2 are used.

  • Page 351: Synchronizing Data Signals And Clock Signals

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Connector Location Clock Mode CLOCK OUT rear panel Choice of bit clock or symbol clock BITCLK AUX I/O interface, rear panel Bit clock SYMBCLK AUX I/O interface, rear panel Symbol clock The active edge of the external clock signal on the CLOCK input is selectable (menu "Setup >...
  • Page 352 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block In the following example, the diagram shows the output signals of an 8-PSK modulation (3 bits per symbol) on the serial DATA interface. The positive edge of the clock is always used when outputting data.
  • Page 353 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Fig. 5-29: External serial data and the clock signals which are output (bit clock and symbol clock). The setup time (t_setup) and hold time (t_hold) can be found in the data sheet.

  • Page 354: Control Signals

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Fig. 5-31: External serial data and external symbol clock - 3 bits/symbol with high and low active symbol clock for marking the LSB. The data and the symbol clock must change state simulta- neously.
  • Page 355 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block In case of standards in which it is possible to switch between different modulation modes, the signal is output only and cannot be supplied from an external source. In such cases it indicates the modulation mode internally (standard GSM: signal high (1) = modulation mode GMSK and signal low (0) = modulation mode 8PSK EDGE).

  • Page 356: Trigger Signals

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Fig. 5-33: Signal behavior when power ramping is enabled. The Burst Gate signal defines the start of the rising and falling edges of the envelope, and the Lev Att signal defines the start and end of level attenuation.

  • Page 357: Marker Output Signals

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block example in the course of base station tests, and yet the signal can still be generated synchronously. In each frame the base station generates a trigger which would cause a signal generation restart every time but for the suppression.

  • Page 358: Overview And Required Options

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block 5.8.3.1 Overview and Required Options The equipment layout for generating the digital modulation signals includes the options Baseband Main Module (R&S SMU-B13) and Baseband Generator (R&S SMU-B9/B10/ B11). In the case of two-path instruments, at least one further Baseband Generator (R&S SMU- B9/B10/B11) option is needed for signal generation in the second path.
  • Page 359 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Table 5-5: Modulation type and associated mapping 1 bit per symbol SOUR:BB:DM:FORM ASK BPSK QPSK QPSK 45° Offset 1 bit per symbol 2 bits per symbol 2 bits per symbol, 45° rotation...
  • Page 360 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block pi/8-D8PSK 8PSK 8PSK EDGE (3pi/8 8PSK) 3 bits per symbol 3 bits per symbol 3 bits per symbol Differential coding, pi/8 rotation SOUR:BB:DM:FORM PSK8 Edge coding, 3pi/8 rotation SOUR:BB:DM:FORM P8D8...
  • Page 361 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block 256QAM 1024QAM 8 bits per symbol 10 bits per symbol SOUR:BB:DM:FORM QAM256 SOUR:BB:DM:FORM QAM1024 2FSK 4FSK 1 bit per symbol, FSK deviation 1 bit per symbol 2 bit per symbol...

  • Page 362: Coding - Custom Digital Mod

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block ated with the R&S mapping wizard. The mapping wizard (mapwiz) is a tool from Rohde & Schwarz designed for editing modulation schemes (e.g. QPSK, 32QAM). Its main pur- pose is the assignment of logical symbol numbers to constellation points and the selection of modulation specific parameters.
  • Page 363 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Differ- Phase Diff. Gray NADC, TFTS/ INMARSAT, (FSK) ential Diff. +Gray PDC, TETRA ICO, WCDMA, PHS, cdma2000 TETRA, APCO25 (PSK), 32QAM 64QAM 256QAM 1024QAM Modulation type pi/4DQPSK With differential coding switched on at the same time, a constellation diagram is obtained for pi/4DQPSK which is similar to that obtained for 8PSK.
  • Page 364 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Example: Differential coding for QPSK modulation with K = 2 bit/symbol Decimal display; value range for modulation symbols Recursive coding is defined as follows: b = (a ) modulo 4...

  • Page 365: Baseband Filter - Custom Digital Mod

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block 5.8.3.4 Baseband Filter - Custom Digital Mod The R&S SMU offers a wide selection of predefined baseband filters. The filter charac- teristic for the selected filter is displayed in the "More..." submenu in the "Filter" menu section (see chapter 5.8.3.6.6,...
  • Page 366 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block cdmaOne + Equalizer cdmaOne 705 kHz + Equalizer cdma2000 3X SOUR:BB:DM:FILT:TYPE COE SOUR:BB:DM:FILT:TYPE SOUR:BB:DM:FILT:TYPE DM3x COFE228 APCO25 Split Phase Rectangular Roll Off Factor SOUR:BB:DM:FILT:TYPE RECT SOUR:BB:DM:FILT:TYPE SOUR:BB:DM:FILT:TYPE APCO25 SOUR:BB:DM:FILT:PAR:SPH SOUR:BB:DM:FILT:PAR:APC 0.15...

  • Page 367: Conflicting Settings - Custom Digital Mod

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block EUTRA/LTE SOUR:BB:DM:FILT:TYPE LTEFilter User filter The user filter file must have extention *.vaf and can be created with the R&S filter wizard. The filter wizard (filtwiz) is a tool from Rohde & Schwarz designed for creating filter files that can be imported on a R&S SMU.

  • Page 368: Custom Digital Mod User Interface

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block ated does not correspond to this display. A conflict of settings can be triggered if the user changes a parameter inappropriately. The message disappears as soon as a conflict- free setting is entered.
  • Page 369 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block The filter is set in the "Filter" section. The "More" button opens a submenu where the filter characteristic of the selected filter is displayed. The buttons in the lower part of the menu open submenus for power ramping and for configuring triggers, markers and clocks.
  • Page 370 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Parameter Value Modulation Type Filter Gauss (FSK) Filter Parameter BxT Power Ramp Control Attenuation 15 dB Ramp Time 1 sym Ramp Function Cosine Fall Delay Rise Delay Source Internal State...
  • Page 371 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block The complete settings in the "Custom Digital Modulation "menu are saved and recalled. SCPI command: on page 654 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:SETTing:CATalog on page 654 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:SETTing:DELete on page 655 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:SETTing:LOAD on page 655 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:SETTing:STORe...
  • Page 372 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block "External Paral- External parallel data is supplied externally via the PARDATA pins on lel (AUX I/O)" the AUX I/O interface. SCPI command: on page 622 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:SOURce List Management - Digital Modulation Calls the menu for managing data and control lists (see chapter 5.8.3.6.8, "List Manage-...
  • Page 373 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Standard Modulation Symbol Rate Filter Coding Parameter for IEC command NADC pi/4 DQPSK 24.3 ksym/s Root Cosine, NADC NADC alpha = 0.35 pi/4 DQPSK 21.0 ksym/s Root Cosine, alpha = 0.50 pi/4 DQPSK 192.0 ksym/s...
  • Page 374 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block When the modulation type changes, the range is automatically redefined. If the set sym- bol rate is outside this range, an error message is generated and the maximum value for the newly chosen modulation type is automatically set.
  • Page 375 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block m = (Amplitude -Amplitude ) / (Amplitude +Amplitude SCPI command: on page 639 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:ASK:DEPTh FSK Deviation - Digital Modulation Sets the frequency deviation for FSK modulation. The range of values depends on the chosen symbol rate (see data sheet).
  • Page 376 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block In case of selection "Variable FSK", the FSK type and the deviation for each symbols is set in the "Variable FSK" section. FSK Type - Digital Modulation (Variable FSK only) Selects the FSK modulation type for selection "Variable FSK".
  • Page 377 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Modulation - CW Switching The "Modulation <=> CW Switching" section is used to enable switching the signal between modulated and unmodulated. State Mod - CW - Digital Modulation Enables switching between a modulated and an unmodulated signal.
  • Page 378 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Sets the value for the cut off frequency factor. The cut off frequency of the lowpass filter (ACP and EVM optimization) can be adjusted to reach spectrum mask requirements. SCPI command: on page 637 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:FILTer:PARameter:LPASs...
  • Page 379 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Power Ramp Control - Digital Modulation Calls the power ramp control menu (see chapter 5.8.3.6.11, "Power Ramp Control", on page 366). SCPI command: n.a. Trigger/Marker - Digital Modulation Calls the "Trigger/Marker/Clock" menu. The "Trigger/Marker/Clock" menu is used to...
  • Page 380 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block For more information, see chapter 4.7, "File Management", on page 113. To ensure that the selected data or control list is used for generating the digital signal, the list must be selected as the data source:...
  • Page 381 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Data List Editor The "Data List Editor" for editing the selected data list is called up in the "List Manage- ment" submenu of the "Custom Digital Modulation" main menu by means of the "Edit Data List..."...
  • Page 382 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Start Select ← Data List Editor Defines the current cursor position as the start position for the range to be marked. The stop position is defined by entering an offset under "GoTo".
  • Page 383 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block SCPI command: n.a. Control and Marker List Editor The "Control and Marker List Editor" for editing the selected control list is called up in the "List Management" submenu of the "Custom Digital Modulation" main menu by means of the "Edit Control List"...
  • Page 384 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block ● The display of the current cursor position in the "Cursor" menu section if the cursor marks the ramp. The ramps can be set either graphically in the "Select Ramp to Edit" section or in the table of the "Positions <Signal>"...
  • Page 385 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Total List Length - Digital Modulation Enters the length of the definition range of the control list in bits. The starting value is always bit 0. The entire definition range is displayed, i.e. the bit scale is adapted to the entry.
  • Page 386 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block The ramps of the selected signal can be edited in the table. When the table is opened, the current configuration of the selected marker/control signal is displayed. The bit position is specified in the "Ramp Position" column, the high or low signal status in the "Ramp State"...
  • Page 387 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block The menu is used to set the power ramping. Control signals "Burst" and "Lev_Att" are used to control power ramping (see chapter 5.8.2.6.1, "Power Ramping and Level Attenu- ation", on page 335).
  • Page 388 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block "Cosine" The transmitted power rises and falls with a cosine-shaped edge. This gives rise to a more favorable spectrum than the "Linear" setting. SCPI command: on page 644 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:PRAMp:SHAPe Ramp Time - Digital Modulation Enters the power ramping rise time and fall time for a burst.
  • Page 389 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block SCPI command: on page 643 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:PRAMp:FDELay Attenuation - Power Ramp Control - Digital Modulation Sets the level attenuation relative to the average level for the signal ranges in which the level is set to "attenuated"...
  • Page 390 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block The "Trigger In" section is where the trigger for the modulation signal is set. Various parameters will be provided for the settings, depending on which trigger source - internal or external - is selected. The current status of signal generation ("Running" or "Stop- ped") is indicated for all trigger modes.
  • Page 391 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Trigger In The "Trigger In" section is used to configure the trigger signal for the digital modulation. The current status of signal generation is indicated for all trigger modes. Trigger Mode - Digital Modulation Selects trigger mode.
  • Page 392 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Arm - Digital Modulation Stops signal generation. This button appears only with "Running" signal generation in the "Armed_Auto" and "Armed_Retrigger" trigger modes. Signal generation can be restarted by a new trigger (internally with "Execute Trigger" or externally).
  • Page 393 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block "Off" The signal output begins after elapsing of the processing time and starts with sample 0, i.e. the complete signal is outputted. This mode is recommended for triggering of short signal sequences with signal duration comparable with the processing time of the instrument.
  • Page 394 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Marker x - Digital Modulation Selects a marker signal for the associated MARKER output. "CList" A marker signal that is defined in the selected control list is generated. "Pulse" A regular marker signal is generated. The clock frequency is defined by entering a divider.
  • Page 395 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block If the setting "Fix marker delay to dynamic range" is enabled, the setting range is restricted to the dynamic range. In this range the delay of the marker signals can be set without restarting the marker and signal.

  • Page 396: Arbitrary Waveform Generator Arb

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block "Multiple Sym- A multiple of the symbol clock is supplied via the CLOCK connector, the bol" symbol clock is derived internally from this. The "Multiplier" window provided allows the multiplication factor to be entered.
  • Page 397 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block The three Baseband Generator options feature different ARB memory sizes (see data sheet). Apart from the memory size, however, the three options offer the same function- ality, either one can be installed.
  • Page 398 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Multi carrier waveforms consisting of up to 512 carriers modulated by user-selectable baseband signals can be created in order to simulate complex multi carrier scenarios with different baseband signals (e.g. CDMA2000 or 3GPP FDD).
  • Page 399 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Waveforms generated by the R&S WinIQSIM2 software can be optimized by choosing a suitable integer oversampling factor. In comparison with conventional ARB generators that often assume oversampling factors of 4, the ARB generator of the R&S Signal Generator requires low oversampling factors (see the example above), but still providing excellent signal quality in terms of EVM and ACP.

  • Page 400: Arb User Interface

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Hence a memory size of 256 MB yields a maximum waveform length of 56 MSamples if four markes are enabled. The maximum waveform length increases to 64 MSamples if the internal hardware markers are used, and the complete memory is available for I/Q data.
  • Page 401 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block The buttons in the lower part of the menu open submenus for setting triggers and clocks, for configuring the test signal and for calculating a multi segment waveform or a multi carrier waveform.
  • Page 402 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Set To Default Calls default settings. The values are shown in the table 5-12. Table 5-12: Default Settings Parameter Value State Clock Freq. 1 MHz Trigger Mode Auto Trigger Source...
  • Page 403 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block The waveform information displayed in this dialog depends on whether the selected waveform file is a multi segment one or not. All parameters are read-only. For non-multi segment waveform files, the values of the settings can be queried by means of the Tag commands (see chapter 7.3, "R&S Signal Generator Waveform and List For-...
  • Page 404 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block When intending to work with an external clock source, the frequency to be applied must be entered here. SCPI command: on page 582 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:CLOCk Trigger/Marker Calls the Trigger and Marker menu.
  • Page 405 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Multi Carrier Calls the menu for calculating multi carrier waveforms (see chapter 5.8.4.3, "Multi Carrier Waveforms", on page 412). SCPI command: n.a. Trigger/Marker/Clock Settings To access this dialog, select "Main Menu > Trigger/Marker".
  • Page 406 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block The "Clock Settings" section is where the clock source is selected and - in the case of an external source - the clock type. The buttons in the last section lead to submenu for general trigger, clock and mapping settings.
  • Page 407 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block "Single" The signal is generated only when a trigger event occurs. Then the signal is generated once to the length specified at "Signal Duration". Every subsequent trigger event (internal with "Execute Trigger" or exter- nal) causes a restart.
  • Page 408 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Trigger Source Selects trigger source. This setting is effective only when a trigger mode other than "Auto" has been selected. "Internal" The trigger event is executed by "Execute Trigger". "Internal (Base- (two-path instruments only) band A/B)"...
  • Page 409 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block "Off" The signal output begins after elapsing of the processing time and starts with sample 0, i.e. the complete signal is outputted. This mode is recommended for triggering of short signal sequences with signal duration comparable with the processing time of the instrument.
  • Page 410 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block The section comprises the settings necessary to adjust the trigger for the switch between the segments of a multi segment waveform. The parameters displayed depend on the selected trigger source.
  • Page 411 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block ● When "Next Segment" Seamless is selected and a new segment trigger event occurs, the new segment is not output until the whole of the current segment has been output (wrap around).
  • Page 412 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block The "Trigger Example" graph displays schematically the waveform output, depending on the activated trigger and the next segment settings. "Same Seg- Depending on the trigger setting, the currently selected segment is con- ment"...
  • Page 413 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block "Next Segment"Depending on the trigger setting, the segment selected under "Next Segment" is output either immediately or after a trigger event. ● In the case of "internal Trigger = Auto", output starts at once and the segment is generated continuously.
  • Page 414 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block "Next Segment The segment selected under "Next Segment" is output. Seamless" This mode is only available if all segments have the same sample rate. ● In the case of "Internal Trigger = Auto", output starts at once and the segment is generated continuously.
  • Page 415 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block To perform a switchover to any segment within the multi segment file, adjust the param- eter "Next Segment". This parameter is disabled, if a sequencing play list is enabled. SCPI command: on page 619 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:WSEGment:NEXT:EXECute...
  • Page 416 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block "Pattern " A marker signal that is defined by a bit pattern is generated. The pattern has a maximum length of 64 bits and is defined in an input field which opens when "pattern"...
  • Page 417 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Fix marker delay to current range Restricts the marker delay setting range to the dynamic range. In this range the delay can be set without restarting the marker and signal.
  • Page 418 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Global Settings The buttons in this section lead to submenu for general trigger, clock and mapping set- tings. Global Trigger/Clock Settings Calls the "Global Trigger/Clock/Input Settings" dialog. This dialog is used among other things for setting the trigger threshold, the input impe- dance and the polarity of the clock and trigger inputs.
  • Page 419 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Frequency (Sine Test Signal) Enters the frequency of the test signal. SCPI command: on page 596 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TSIGnal:SINE:FREQuency Samples per Period (Sine Test Signal) Enters the number of sample values required from the sine wave per period.
  • Page 420 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Frequency (Rect Test Signal) Enters the frequency of the test signal. SCPI command: on page 595 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TSIGnal:RECTangle:FREQuency Samples per Period (Rect Test Signal) Enters the number of sample values required for the rectangular signal per period.

  • Page 421: Multi Segment Waveforms

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block I Value (Const IQ Test Signal) Enters the value for the I component of the test signal. SCPI command: on page 595 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TSIGnal:CIQ:I Q Value (Const IQ Test Signal) Enters the value for the Q component of the test signal.
  • Page 422 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block To access the "Multi Segment" dialog, select "Baseband > ARB > Multi Segment...". The menu can be used to create a multi segment waveform from existing waveforms and save it under its own name. As with normal waveforms, the file extension is *.wv. Infor- mation on whether a file is a multi segment waveform is displayed in the File menu with the tag information when a waveform is loaded.
  • Page 423 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Multi Segment File Contents The upper part of the dialog provides the functions, necessary to create and adjust the contents of the multi segment file. Multi Segment Table The table lists the individual waveforms (segments) of the selected multi segment wave- form.
  • Page 424 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Blank Segment The Blank Segment section is where a blank segment can be configured. Clock Rate Selects the clock rate of the blank segment. SCPI command: n.a. Samples Selects the number of samples for the blank segment.
  • Page 425 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block "Highest" All segments are output at the highest available clock rate. This mode provides very short switchover times between segments. The time for calculating the multi segment waveform is increased since the individual segments have to be resampled.
  • Page 426 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block "Marker 1/2/3/4"Generates a restart marker signal at the beginning of each segment for the corresponding marker. The segment begin is defined by the low-high slope of the marker. This applies for switching between two segments as well as in case of seg- ment replay.
  • Page 427 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Load List Opens the file menu to select the configuration file to be edited. SCPI command: n.a. New List Calls the "Create Multi Segment Waveform List" dialog to enter the name of the new file.
  • Page 428 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block The file name of the waveform file is always determined with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:WSEGment:CONFigure:OFILe SCPI command: on page 615 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:WSEGment:CLOad Multi Segment Waveform Sequencing The settings provided in the "Multi Segment Waveform Sequencing" dialog can be adjus- ted to crate a “play list”, i.e.
  • Page 429 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Assigned to Multi Seg. Waveform Displays the name of the multi segment waveform file the current sequencing list file is assigned to. SCPI command: n.a. Sequencing Play List The "Sequencing Play List" table is used to define the sequence in which the waveform file segments are processed and how many times each of them is repeated.
  • Page 430 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block "Goto Id#" Determines the row number of the segment to be processed next. This feature is currently limited for the first 32 rows. SCPI command: n.a. Info ← Sequencing Play List Opens a dialog with detailed information about the currently selected waveform.
  • Page 431 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block The default file name of the play list file is the same as the multi segment waveform file name, but it can be changed. Play list files have the file extension *.wvs.

  • Page 432: Multi Carrier Waveforms

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block 3. "Trigger Source" = "Internal or External" If the waveforms have different sample rates: 4. "Clock Mode" = "Highest" or "User" (when creating the waveform in the Multi Segment Editor) 5.8.4.3...
  • Page 433 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block The buttons in the middle part of the menu open submenus for defining the carrier table. The carrier settings can be checked in the graphical "Carrier Graph" submenu. The "Output Settings" section indicates the name, the size and the clock rate of the multi carrier waveform (after calculation).
  • Page 434 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block From the "Save/Recall" menu the "File Select" windows for saving and recalling the con- figurations of the ARB "Multi Carrier" submenu and the "File Manager" can be called. SCPI command: on page 609 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:SETTing:LOAD...
  • Page 435 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block The crest factor represents the ratio of the peak voltage value to the rms voltage value. The higher the crest factor and resulting dynamics of a signal, the greater the requirement for a power amplifier fed by the signal to be linear.
  • Page 436 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block The resulting period is always calculated for all carriers in the carrier table irrespective of their state (ON/OFF). Note: Wrap-around and timing problems may occur when I/Q signals of different length are used.
  • Page 437 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Output Settings The "Output Settings" section in the multi carrier main menu indicates the name, the size and the clock rate of the currently calculated multi carrier output file. File Opens the "File"...
  • Page 438 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Depending on the configuration of the multi carrier waveform, calculation may take some time. A panel with a progress bar and an "Abort" button appears during the calculation process. SCPI command: on page 603 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CREate...
  • Page 439 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Carrier Table Assistant Number of Carriers Defines the number of carriers of the multi carrier waveform. This parameter is identical to that in the "General Setting" section. SCPI command: on page 598 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CARRier:COUNt...
  • Page 440 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Phase Step Sets the step width that is used to increment the phase. The resulting phase in the carrier table equals: PhaseStart + n* PhaseStep where n ranges from 0 to (Carrier Stop – Carrier Start)
  • Page 441 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block No ← Carrier Table Indicates the carrier index ranging from 0 to (number of carriers -1). Individual carriers can be set using the remote control commands by specifying the index in the parameter CARR.

  • Page 442: Multi Carrier Continuous Wave

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block 3. Setup a multi carrier scenario with 4 carriers and a carrier spacing of 5 MHz. 4. Apply the input file containing the previously generated 3GPP testmodel to all 4 car- riers.
  • Page 443 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block The buttons in the lower part of the menu open dialogs for defining carrier tables and for configuring markers, triggers and clocks. The carrier settings can be visualized in the graphical "Carrier Graph" dialog.
  • Page 444 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Parameter Value Desired Crest Factor 3 dB Trigger Mode Auto Source Internal Ext. Delay Ext. Inhibit Marker Channel 1...4 Restart Clock Source Internal Multi Channel Setup Start Carrier Stop Carrier...
  • Page 445 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block When entering fewer carriers than the table contains, the approach is generally to delete the superfluous entries from the table, and when entering more carriers than the table contains the missing entries are usually added at the end of the table.
  • Page 446 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block "Target Crest" Optimization of the crest factor to a desired value for all carrier configu- rations. The optimization time depends on the number of carriers and the desired crest factor. Computation time increases only when the number of carriers exceeds 256 and the crest factor is below 4 dB.
  • Page 447 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block The carrier power that is set with Power + n* Power Step must be within the valid value range -80 dB to 0 dB. SCPI command: on page 675 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:EDIT:CARRier:POWer:STEP Phase Start Sets the phase of the starting carrier.
  • Page 448 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block The Multi Carrier CW signal is only computed when the "Accept" button is pressed. Whenever the table contains settings that have not yet been adopted with the "Accept" button, the background is yellow.
  • Page 449 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block This dialog is used to select the trigger source, set the time delay on an external trigger signal and configure the marker output signals. SCPI command: n.a. Clock Calls the "Clock" dialog for selecting the clock source (see chapter 5.8.5.1.5.4, "Clock...
  • Page 450 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block The "Clock Settings" section is where the clock source is selected and - in the case of an external source - the clock type. The buttons in the last section lead to submenu for general trigger, clock and mapping settings.
  • Page 451 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block "Single" The signal is generated only when a trigger event occurs. Then the signal is generated once to the length specified at "Signal Duration". Every subsequent trigger event (internal with "Execute Trigger" or exter- nal) causes a restart.
  • Page 452 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block "Internal (Base- (two-path instruments only) band A/B)" The trigger event is executed by the trigger signal from the second path "External The trigger event is executed with the aid of the active edge of an external (TRIGGER 1 / trigger signal.
  • Page 453 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Trigger Delay Sets the trigger signal delay in samples on external triggering or on internal triggering via the second path. Sets the trigger signal delay in samples on external triggering.
  • Page 454 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block "ON/OFF A regular marker signal that is defined by an ON/OFF ratio is generated. Period" A period lasts one ON and OFF cycle. The "ON Time" and "OFF Time" are each expressed as a number of samples and are set in an input field which opens when ON/OFF ratio is selected.
  • Page 455 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A Baseband Signal - Baseband Block Clock Source Selects the clock source. "Internal" The internal clock reference is used to generate the symbol clock. "External" The external clock reference is fed in as the symbol clock or multiple thereof via the CLOCK connector.

  • Page 456: External Baseband Signal - Baseband Input

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A External Baseband Signal - Baseband Input User Marker / AUX I/O Settings Calls the "User Marker AUX I/O Settings" menu, used used to map the connector on the rear of the instruments. See also chapter 5.2.3.12, "User Marker / AUX I/O Settings", on page 140.

  • Page 457: Bb Input Block

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A External Baseband Signal - Baseband Input Fig. 5-34: External Baseband Signals For sample rates in the range of 400 Hz ... <100 MHz, the external clock must be provided, it is required to reconstruct the signal (Baseband In Mode "Digital Input" (Sample Rate Source "Digital I/Q In")).

  • Page 458: Baseband Input Settings Menu

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A External Baseband Signal - Baseband Input components of the recognized R&S EX-IQ-Box are listed in the Hardware Config, section Baseband Assembly. The external baseband signal is activated by switching on in the Baseband Input settings menu as well as by ticking the checkbox of the BB Input function block.
  • Page 459 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A External Baseband Signal - Baseband Input Baseband Input General Settings State Switches On/Off the feeding of an external analog or digital signal into the signal path. An external analog signal is A/D-converted and fed into path A or path B or into both paths simultaneously.
  • Page 460 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A External Baseband Signal - Baseband Input Opens the main settings dialog of the R&S EX-IQ-Box. I/Q-Swap Activates swapping of the I and Q signal components, which mirrors the spectrum at the f=0 line and inverts the sign of the frequency.
  • Page 461 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A External Baseband Signal - Baseband Input "OFL = Over- The external sample rate frequency is too high which causes an overflow flow" in signal transmission. "URUN = The external sample rate frequency is too low which causes an underrun Underrun"...
  • Page 462 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A External Baseband Signal - Baseband Input Indicates the peak level acquired with "Auto Level Set". SCPI command: on page 695 [:SOURce]:BBIN:POWer:PEAK Level Indicates the estimated rms level acquired with "Auto Level Set". SCPI command: on page 695...
  • Page 463 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A External Baseband Signal - Baseband Input I/Q-Skew (Q Delay) Analog Input only Determines the delay between Q and I channel. Positive values represent a delay for Q versus I. SCPI command: on page 696 [:SOURce]:BBIN:SKEW Signal Monitoring The section "Signal Monitoring"...

  • Page 464: Signal Routing And Frequency Shifting

    ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A External Baseband Signal - Baseband Input 5.9.1.2 Signal Routing and Frequency Shifting A frequency offset and a path gain can be set in the corresponding menu items of the "BB Input" block menu. For two-path instruments, the routing of the signals can be defined in the "Signal Rout- ing"...
  • Page 465 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A External Baseband Signal - Baseband Input Example: The following graph shows the setting range for the frequency offset. Fig. 5-35: 3GPP FDD signal (chip rate 3.84 Mcps, root-cosine filter 0.22). The complex useful bandwidth of a signal which has been filtered using a root-cosine...
  • Page 466 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A External Baseband Signal - Baseband Input The "Path Gains" of the different baseband sources (Baseband In A, Baseband In B, Baseband A and Baseband B) determine the gain of the associated signals relative to each other. The actual gain of the different baseband signals depends not only on the path gain setting but also on the signal characteristics like the crest factor, on the number of used sources and on the total output level.
  • Page 467 ® Instrument Function R&S SMU200A External Baseband Signal - Baseband Input "Route to path The external baseband signal is fed into path B. If an internal signal from B" pathB is generated at the same time, the two signals are summed.

  • Page 469: Remote Control Basics

    ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols 6 Remote Control Basics This chapter provides basic information on operating an instrument via remote control. 6.1 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols The instrument supports different interfaces for remote control. The following table gives an overview.

  • Page 470: Visa Libraries

    ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols 6.1.1 VISA Libraries VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to communicate with instruments. The I/O channel (LAN or TCP/IP, USB, GPIB,...) is selected at initialization time by means of the channel–specific address string ("VISA resource string"), or by an appropriately defined VISA alias (short name).

  • Page 471: Lan Interface

    ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols They refer to functions such as management of the standardized status registers, reset and self test. Instrument control commands refer to functions depending on the features of the instrument such as frequency settings. Many of these commands have also been standardized by the SCPI committee.

  • Page 472: Vxi-11 Protocol

    ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols Example: Instrument has the IP address 192.1.2.3; the valid resource string is: TCPIP::192.1.2.3::INSTR Computer name is RSSM1; the valid resource string is: TCPIP::RSSM1::INSTR Identifying instruments in a network If several instruments are connected to the network, each instrument has its own IP address and associated resource string.

  • Page 473: Gpib Interface (Iec/Ieee Bus Interface)

    ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols Command Long term Effect on the instrument &GTL Go to Local Transition to the "local" state (manual control). &GTR Go to Remote Transition to the "remote" state (remote control).

  • Page 474: Gpib Instrument Address

    ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols Command Effect on the instrument DCL (Device Clear) Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state. Does not change the instrument settings.

  • Page 475: Starting A Remote Control Session

    ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Starting a Remote Control Session Select parameter "GPIB channel address" and set the GPIB address. 2. Using remote control command: SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 18 6.2 Starting a Remote Control Session The instrument and the controller have to be connected with the suitable cable and switched on.

  • Page 476: Returning To Manual Operation

    ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Starting a Remote Control Session The instrument remains in the remote state until it is reset to the manual state via the instrument or via the remote control interface (see chapter 6.2.2, "Returning to Man- Operation", on page 456).

  • Page 477: Examples

    ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Starting a Remote Control Session c) While using the socket communication, terminate the remote control session. d) Send the interface command &GTL via the remote control interface. Tip: Use the &NREN to enable the LOCAL key if the key is disabled.

  • Page 478: Remote Control Over Lan Using Vxi-11 Protocol

    ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Starting a Remote Control Session 6.2.3.2 Remote Control over LAN using VXI-11 Protocol Through the examples in this section, the program 'Measurement & Automation Explorer' from National Instruments under Windows operating system is used for setting up a LAN remote control link and starting a remote control session.
  • Page 479 ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Starting a Remote Control Session 6. Enter the IP address or the host name of the R&S SMU and select "Next". 7. Enter the alias name if required. The alias name must not be mistaken for the computer name. It is only used for instrument identification within the program and displayed in the menu as an option in case of an Ethernet link.
  • Page 480 ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Starting a Remote Control Session 9. To test the connection, select "Validate". A message indicates whether the link to the instrument can be set up or not. If a connection cannot be set up, check whether the controller and the instrument are connected to the network (network cable) and switched on.

  • Page 481: Remote Control Over Lan Using Socket Communication

    ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Starting a Remote Control Session 3. In the "viWrite" tab, write the command to be send to the instrument and select "Execute". Instrument responses are displayed on the "viRead" tab. Tip: For further program operation refer to the online help of the program.
  • Page 482 ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Starting a Remote Control Session The socket address is a combination of the IP address or the host name of the R&S SMU and the number of the port configured for remote-control via telnet.
  • Page 483 ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Starting a Remote Control Session TcpClient.h #include <string> using namespace std; //defines structs for socket handling #ifndef LINUX #include "Winsock2.h" #else #include <netinet/in.h> #endif typedef struct sockaddr_in SockAddrStruct; typedef struct hostent HostInfoStruct; class TcpClient public: TcpClient();...
  • Page 484 ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Starting a Remote Control Session TcpClient::~TcpClient() currentHostInfo = NULL; void TcpClient::connectToServer( string &hostname, int port ) currentHostInfo = gethostbyname( hostname.c_str( ) ); if( currentHostInfo == NULL ) #ifndef LINUX int error = WSAGetLastError(); switch (error) case WSANOTINITIALISED: throw string("...
  • Page 485 ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Starting a Remote Control Session currentHostName = ""; currentPort = 0; currentHostInfo = NULL; clientIsConnected = false; throw string("can't create socket\n" ); serverAddress.sin_family = currentHostInfo->h_addrtype; serverAddress.sin_port = htons( currentPort ); memcpy( (char *) &serverAddress.sin_addr.s_addr, currentHostInfo->...
  • Page 486 ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Starting a Remote Control Session if( !clientIsConnected ) throw string("connection must be established before any data can be received\n"); char * receiveBuffer = new char[receiveBufferSize]; memset( receiveBuffer, 0, receiveBufferSize ); bool receiving = true;...
  • Page 487 ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Starting a Remote Control Session case 3: useSingleCommand = true; singleCommand = argv[2]; case 2: hostname = argv[1]; break; default: printUsage(); getchar(); return(-1); #ifndef LINUX WORD wVersionRequested = MAKEWORD( 2, 2 ); WSADATA wsaData;...

  • Page 488: Scpi Command Structure

    ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A SCPI Command Structure client.receive( rcStr ); cout << rcStr; if( useSingleCommand ) terminate = true; }catch( const string errorString ) cout<<errorString<<endl<<endl; cout<<"Press Enter to exit"<<endl; getchar(); client.disconnect( ); return errorCode; 6.3 SCPI Command Structure SCPI commands consist of a so-called header and, in most cases, one or more param- eters.

  • Page 489: Syntax For Device-Specific Commands

    ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A SCPI Command Structure 6.3.2 Syntax for Device-Specific Commands Not all commands used in the following examples are necessarily implemented in the instrument. For demonstration purposes only, assume the existence of the following commands for this section: ●...
  • Page 490 ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A SCPI Command Structure Example: Definition: HardCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant[<N>] Command: HCOP:PAGE:DIM:QUAD2 This command refers to the quadrant 2. Different numbering in remote control For remote control, the suffix may differ from the number of the corresponding selection used in manual operation.

  • Page 491: Scpi Parameters

    ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A SCPI Command Structure Example: Definition:HardCOPy:DEVice:CMAP:COLor:RGB <red>,<green>,<blue> Command:HCOP:DEV:CMAP:COL:RGB 3,32,44 Special characters Parameters A vertical stroke in parameter definitions indicates alternative possibilities in the sense of "or". The effect of the command differs, depending on which parameter is used.
  • Page 492 ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A SCPI Command Structure The parameters required for each command and the allowed range of values are speci- fied in the command description. Numeric values Numeric values can be entered in any form, i.e. with sign, decimal point and exponent.
  • Page 493 ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A SCPI Command Structure ● INF/NINF INFinity, Negative INFinity (NINF) represent the numeric values 9.9E37 or -9.9E37, respectively. INF and NINF are only sent as instrument responses. ● Not A Number (NAN) represents the value 9.91E37. NAN is only sent as a instrument response.

  • Page 494: Overview Of Syntax Elements

    ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A SCPI Command Structure Example: HCOP:ITEM:LABel "Test1" or HCOP:ITEM:LABel 'Test1' Block data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data. A command using a block data parameter has the following structure:...

  • Page 495: Responses To Queries

    ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A SCPI Command Structure ● a <New Line> with EOI ● an EOI together with the last data byte Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon ";". If the next command belongs to a different command system, the semicolon is followed by a colon.

  • Page 496: Command Sequence And Synchronization

    ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Command Sequence and Synchronization ● Truth values (Boolean values) are returned as 0 (for OFF) and 1 (for ON). Example: Setting command: HCOPy:DEV:COL ON Query: HCOPy:DEV:COL? Response: 1 ● Text (character data) is returned in a short form.

  • Page 497: Preventing Overlapping Execution

    ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Command Sequence and Synchronization As a general rule, send commands and queries in different program messages. Example: Overlapping command with *OPC The instrument implements INITiate[:IMMediate] as an overlapped command. Assuming that INITiate[:IMMediate] takes longer to execute than *OPC, sending...
  • Page 498 ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Command Sequence and Synchronization Table 6-2: Synchronization using *OPC, *OPC? and *WAI Com- Action Programming the controller mand ● *OPC Sets the Operation Complete bit in the ESR Setting bit 0 in the ESE ●...

  • Page 499: Status Reporting System

    ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Status Reporting System *OPC? with short timeout 1. Send the overlapped command without *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI 2. Poll the operation complete state periodically (by means of a timer) using the sequence: <short timeout>; *OPC? 3.
  • Page 500 ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Status Reporting System Fig. 6-1: Graphical overview of the status registers hierarchy ● STB, SRE The STatus Byte (STB) register and its associated mask register Service Request Enable (SRE) form the highest level of the status reporting system. The STB provides a rough overview of the instrument status, collecting the information of the lower-level registers.

  • Page 501: Structure Of A Scpi Status Register

    ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Status Reporting System All status registers have the same internal structure. SRE, ESE The service request enable register SRE can be used as ENABle part of the STB if the STB is structured according to SCPI. By analogy, the ESE can be used as the ENABle part of the ESR.

  • Page 502: Contents Of The Status Registers

    ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Status Reporting System This part can be written into and read as required. Its contents are not affected by reading. ● NTRansition The Negative-TRansition part also acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the CONDition part is changed from 1 to 0, the associated NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1.

  • Page 503: Ist Flag And Parallel Poll Enable Register (Ppe)

    ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Status Reporting System (SRQ) is generated. The SRE can be set using the command and read using the *SRE command *SRE?. Table 6-3: Meaning of the bits used in the status byte Bit No.

  • Page 504: Application Of The Status Reporting System

    ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Status Reporting System Table 6-4: Meaning of the bits used in the event status register Bit No. Meaning Operation Complete This bit is set on receipt of the command *OPC exactly when all previous commands have been executed.

  • Page 505: Service Request

    ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Status Reporting System 6.5.5.1 Service Request Under certain circumstances, the instrument can send a service request (SRQ) to the controller. Usually this service request initiates an interrupt at the controller, to which the control program can react appropriately. An SRQ is always initiated if one or several of bits 2, 4 or 5 of the status byte are set and enabled in the SRE.

  • Page 506: Query Of An Instrument Status

    ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A Status Reporting System The parallel poll method is mainly used to find out quickly which one of the instruments connected to the controller has sent a service request. To this effect, SRE and PPE must be set to the same value.

  • Page 507: General Programming Recommendations

    ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A General Programming Recommendations Table 6-5: Resetting the status reporting system Event Switching on supply DCL, SDC *RST or STA- *CLS voltage SYS- Tus:PRE- (Device Tem:PRE- Power-On-Status- Clear, Clear Selected Device Effect Clear) Clear STB, ESR...
  • Page 508 ® Remote Control Basics R&S SMU200A General Programming Recommendations regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well. Operating Manual 1007.9845.32 ─ 15...

  • Page 509: Cal

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Common Commands 7 Remote Control Commands In the following, all remote-control commands will be presented in detail with their param- eters and the ranges of numerical values. For an introduction to remote control and the status registers, refer to chapter 6, "Remote...

  • Page 510: Cls

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Common Commands *CLS CLear Status Sets the status byte (STB), the standard event register (ESR) and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero. The command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers.

  • Page 511: Ist

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Common Commands *IST? Individual STatus query Returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form. The IST flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll. Return values: <ISTflag> 0 | 1...

  • Page 512: Pre

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Common Commands *PRE <Value> Parallel poll Register Enable Sets parallel poll enable register to the indicated value. The query returns the contents of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form. Parameters: <Value> Range: 0 to 255 *PSC <Action>...

  • Page 513: Sav

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Common Commands *SAV <Number> SAVE stores the current device state under the specified number (see also *RCL on page 492). The command is used to store the current instrument state in an inter- mediate memory. The instrument state can be recalled by using the command *RCL with the associated number.

  • Page 514: Wai

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Preset Commands Usage: Query only *WAI WAIt to continue Prevents servicing of the subsequent commands until all preceding commands have been executed and all signals have settled (see also command synchronization and *OPC). Usage: Event 7.2 Preset Commands...
  • Page 515 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Preset Commands Example: SOUR:PRES presets all settings that are related to signal path Usage: Event SYSTem:PRESet <Preset> The command triggers an instrument reset. It has the same effect as the PRESET key on the front panel and the *RST command.

  • Page 516: R&S Signal Generator Waveform And List Format

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A R&S Signal Generator Waveform and List Format 7.3 R&S Signal Generator Waveform and List Format The R&S SMU uses a tag-oriented format for externally or internally generated wave- forms as well as for data and control lists. The data can be transmitted via the GPIB interface from an external computer to the instrument and vice versa.

  • Page 517: Type: Magic, Xxxxxxxx

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A R&S Signal Generator Waveform and List Format .............504 {WAVEFORM-Length: #I0Q0I1Q1...IxQx...IN-1QN-1…} .................505 {MWV_SEGMENT_COUNT: NumOfSeg} ....506 {MWV_SEGMENT_LENGTH: SamplesSeg0, SamplesSeg1, …, SamplesSegN-1} {MWV_SEGMENT_START: SampleStartOffsetSeg0, SampleStartOffsetSeg1, …, ..................506 SampleStartOffsetSegN-1} ..............506 {MWV_SEGMENT_CLOCK_MODE: Mode} .......507 {MWV_SEGMENT_CLOCK: ClockSeg0, ClockSeg1, …, ClockSegN-1} {MWV_SEGMENT_LEVEL_OFFS: RMSOffset_dBSeg0, PeakOffset_dBSeg0, ..........508...

  • Page 518: Clock: Frequency

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A R&S Signal Generator Waveform and List Format Setting parameters: magic Designates the file type and has the following values: SMU-WV The file contains a valid R&S SMU waveform. SMU-MWV The file contains a valid R&S SMU multi segment waveform.

  • Page 519: Comment: String

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A R&S Signal Generator Waveform and List Format Example: {CLOCK: 54000000} BB:ARB:WAV:TAG? 'CLOCK' queries the content of the CLOCK tag. Response: 54000000 the clock frequency is set to 54 MHz. Usage: Setting only {COMMENT: string} The tag contains a plain text ASCII string of arbitrary length.

  • Page 520: Data List-Length: #D0D1

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A R&S Signal Generator Waveform and List Format Example: {DATA BITLENGTH: 444} BB:DM:DLIS:TAG? 'DATA BITLENGTH' queries the content of the DATA BITLENGTH tag of the selected data list file. Response: '444' the data list is 444 bits long.

  • Page 521: Level Offs: Rmsoffset_Db,Peakoffset_Db

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A R&S Signal Generator Waveform and List Format Example: {CONTROL LENGTH: 444} BB:ARB:WAV:TAG? 'CONTROL LENGTH' queries the length of the control list. Response: '444' Usage: Setting only {LEVEL OFFS: RMSOffset_dB,PeakOffset_dB} (recommended for waveforms) The tag determines the level of the ARB signal in the waveform file. The offset levels define the offset of rms and peak value relative to the 16-bit full scale modulation (-32767 to + 32767) = 0 dB.

  • Page 522: Samples: Samples

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A R&S Signal Generator Waveform and List Format {SAMPLES: Samples} (recommended for waveforms) The tag contains the number of I/Q samples in the waveform in ASCII format. On multi segment waveforms, this tag contains the total I/Q samples of all segments.
  • Page 523 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A R&S Signal Generator Waveform and List Format Example: {MARKER LIST 1: 0:0;10:1;20:0;30:1} BB:DM:CLIS:TAG? 'MARKER LIST 1' queries the content of the MARKER LIST 1 tag of the selected control list file. Response: '0:0;10:1;20:0;30:1' the marker setting for samples 0 to 9 = 0 (low), for 10 to 19 = 1 (high) and for 20 to 29 = 0.

  • Page 524: Waveform-Length: #I0Q0I1Q1

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A R&S Signal Generator Waveform and List Format {WAVEFORM-Length: #I0Q0I1Q1...IxQx...IN-1QN-1…} (mandatory for waveforms) The tag contains the actual waveform data or multi segment waveform data (I/Q stream). The TYPE tag decides, wheather the waveform file contains a normal waveform or a multi segment waveform.

  • Page 525: Mwv_Segment_Count: Numofseg

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A R&S Signal Generator Waveform and List Format Setting parameters: Length Specifies the number of bytes in a WAVEFORM tag and is calculated as follow: Length = Number of I/Q pairs * 4 (i.e. 2 bytes per I and 2 bytes per Q value) + 1 byte (i.e.

  • Page 526: Mwv_Segment_Length: Samplesseg0, Samplesseg1

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A R&S Signal Generator Waveform and List Format {MWV_SEGMENT_LENGTH: SamplesSeg0, SamplesSeg1, …, SamplesSegN-1} (mandatory for multi segment waveforms) The tag contains a list of I/Q sample lengths for every segment in the multi segment waveform in ASCII integer format.

  • Page 527: Mwv_Segment_Clock: Clockseg0, Clockseg1

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A R&S Signal Generator Waveform and List Format Setting parameters: Mode UNCHANGED The segments may have different clock rates. During the multi segment calculation, the clock rates of all individual original waveforms were taken over unchanged in the segments of the multi segment output waveform (no software resampling is done).

  • Page 528: Mwv_Segment_Level_Offs: Rmsoffset_Dbseg0, Peakoffset_Dbseg0

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A R&S Signal Generator Waveform and List Format {MWV_SEGMENT_LEVEL_OFFS: RMSOffset_dBSeg0, PeakOffset_dBSeg0, …,RMSOffset_dBSegN-1, PeakOffset_dBSegN-1} (mandatory for multi segment waveforms) The tag contains a list of level pairs in ASCII floating point format, one pair for every segment in the multi segment waveform.

  • Page 529: Control List Width4-Length: #M0M1

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A R&S Signal Generator Waveform and List Format {CONTROL LIST WIDTH4–Length: #m0m1…mx…mM-1} (optional for waveforms and multi segment waveforms) The tag contains a binary marker element stream, which will be given out synchronously to the I/Q sample sequence. One marker element mx consists of 4 bit, which are assigned to the 4 possible marker lines of the instrument (one bit per marker line).
  • Page 530 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A R&S Signal Generator Waveform and List Format 0.000000 1.000000 0.309017 0.951057 0.587785 0.809017 0.809017 0.587785 0.951057 0.309017 1.000000 -0.000000 0.951056 -0.309017 0.809017 -0.587785 0.587785 -0.809017 0.309017 -0.951056 -0.000000 -1.000000 -0.309017 -0.951057 -0.587785 -0.809017 -0.809017 -0.587785 -0.951056 -0.309017...
  • Page 531 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A R&S Signal Generator Waveform and List Format 2. The file SICO.WV now contains the binary data set corresponding to the 20 I/Q pairs. Before this binary data set can be further processed in step 3, the...
  • Page 532 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A R&S Signal Generator Waveform and List Format if (fp == 0) return; for (i=0; i<samples; i++) grad = (360.0 / (float)samples) * (float)i; rad = grad * (pi / 180.0); fprintf(fp, "%f %f\n", sin(rad), cos(rad));...

  • Page 533: Bler:result

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A BERT and BLER Subsystems fclose(fp_dest); fclose(fp_sour); 7.4 BERT and BLER Subsystems These subsystems contain the commands for the bit and block error rate measurement. Since the commands for these two subsystems are essentially identical, they are sum- marized in the following section.

  • Page 534: Bert:result

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A BERT and BLER Subsystems :BERT:RESult? Queries the result of the last BER measurement/BLER measurement. The response consists of seven results separated by commas. In the first measurement following the start, intermediate results for the number of data bits/data blocks, error bits/errors and error rate are also queried.
  • Page 535 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A BERT and BLER Subsystems Return values: <Result> string Value 1 Numer of checked data bits/data blocks Value 2 Number of error bits/errors Value 3 Error rate. If no termination criterion has been reached since the beginning of the measurement, the current quotient of "Number of...

  • Page 536: Bler:sequence

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A BERT and BLER Subsystems :BLER:SEQuence <Sequence> :BERT:SEQuence <Sequence> Selects the type of measurement: single or continuous measurement. These commands are automatically set to AUTO by BERT:STARt or BLER:STARt. Parameters: <Sequence> AUTO|SINGle AUTO Continuous measurement. If one or both termination criteria are met, the measurement in progress is terminated.

  • Page 537: Bler:setup:data[:Polarity]

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A BERT and BLER Subsystems Parameters: <Corder> LSB|MSB The checksum starts with the least significant byte. The checksum starts with the most significant byte. *RST: Example: BLER:SET:CORD MSB the checksum starts with the most significant byte.

  • Page 538: Bert:setup:ignore

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A BERT and BLER Subsystems Parameters: <Denable> OFF|LOW|HIGH Any signal at the Data Enable input is ignored; all data at the BERT data input is used for the measurement. HIGH The Data Enable signal is used. The only data measured is the data at the BERT data input during a high level of the Data Enable signal.

  • Page 539: Bert:setup:mcount

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A BERT and BLER Subsystems :BERT:SETup:MCOunt <Mcount> Enters the number of transmitted data bits/data blocks to be checked before the mea- surement is terminated. With a BER measurement, data that was suppressed by BERT:SETup:DENable is not counted. This termination criterion always terminates the measurement after the specified number of data bits/data blocks.

  • Page 540: Bert:setup:type

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A BERT and BLER Subsystems Parameters: <State> 0|1|OFF|ON The reset signal for the BER measurement is generated internally. This setting is suitable for PRBS sequences that run continuously and thus ensure uninterrupted repetition. The reset signal for the BER measurement is fed via the Restart input of the BERT interface.

  • Page 541: Bler:start

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A BERT and BLER Subsystems Return values: <Type> BLER:SET:TYPE Example: queries the type of measurement. Example: Response: CRC16 Usage: Query only :BLER:STARt :BERT:STARt Starts a continuous measurement. These commands automatically set BERT:SEQuence or BLER:SEQuence to AUTO and BERT:STATe or BLER:STATe to ON.

  • Page 542: Bler:unit

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A BERT and BLER Subsystems Example: BERT:STOP stops the measurement. To start a new measurement, the BER measurement must be switched on again by BERT:STATe ON. Usage: Event :BLER:UNIT <Unit> :BERT:UNIT <Unit> Sets the unit for the error rate display on the screen. BERT|BLER:RES always specifies the error rate as the quotient of "Number of errors"...

  • Page 543: Trigger:bler[:Immediate]

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A CALibration Subsystem Parameters: <Threshold> float Range: 0.01 to 2.0 *RST: 1.00V Default unit: Volt Example: INP:BERT:THR 1 V A high/low threshold of 1 volt is set at the BERT inputs. The signal is high (active) for a signal voltage of 1 volt and higher.

  • Page 544: Calibration:Bbin[:Measure]

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A CALibration Subsystem Example: CAL:ALL:MEAS? starts the adjustment of all functions for the entire instrument. Response: "0" adjustment has been performed successfully. Usage: Query only SCPI conform :CALibration<hw>:BBIN[:MEASure]? The command starts adjustment of the analog I/Q input. The I/Q input is adjusted with respect to DC offset and gain.

  • Page 545: Calibration:Iqmodulator:full

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A CALibration Subsystem :CALibration<hw>:IQModulator:FULL? The command starts adjustment of the I/Q modulator for the entire frequency range. The I/Q modulator is adjusted with respect to carrier leakage, I/Q imbalance and quadrature. Return values: <Full> CAL:IQM:FULL?

  • Page 546: Calibration:Level:state

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A CLOCk Subsystem :CALibration<hw>:LEVel:STATe <State> The command switches on or off internal level correction. Parameters: <State> ON|OFF *RST: Example: CAL:LEV:STAT switches on Level correction. :CALibration<hw>:LEVel:HACCuracy[:STATe] <State> Enables/disables level adjustment with high accuracy. Parameters: <State> 0|1|OFF|ON...

  • Page 547: Diagnostic Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A DIAGnostic Subsystem Parameters: <Slope> NEGative|POSitive *RST: POSitive Example: CLOC:INP:SLOP NEG The active slope of the external clock signal at the CLOCK con- nector is the falling slope. :CLOCk:OUTPut:MODE <Mode> The command sets the output of bit or symbol clock pulses at the CLOCK OUT connector at the rear panel.
  • Page 548 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A DIAGnostic Subsystem ....................529 :DIAGnostic:INFO:POCount :DIAGnostic<hw>:BGINfo? The command checks the modules available in the instrument using the variant and revi- sion state. If the command is sent without parameters being specified, a complete list of all modules is returned (the various entries are separated by commas).

  • Page 549: Display Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A DISPlay Subsystem Example: DIAG:BGIN:CAT queries the names of the assemblies. Response: MBRD,SSYN,IQOP3,IQOP3_LCM,..Usage: Query only :DIAGnostic:INFO:OTIMe? The command queries the number of operation hours. Return values: <OTIMe> float Example: DIAG:INFO:OTIM queries the operation hours.

  • Page 550: Format Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A FORMat Subsystem Example: DISP:PSAV:HOLD 10 sets the wait for the screen saver mode to 10 minutes. :DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe] <State> This command activates/deactivates the screen-save mode of the display. With the screen-save mode activated the display including backlight is completely switched off after the elapse of the wait time (see command DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff) when no entries via front panel, external mouse or external keyboard are made.
  • Page 551 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A FORMat Subsystem Parameters: <Border> NORMal|SWAPped NORMal The instrument expects (with setting commands) and sends (with queries) the least significant byte of each IEEE754 floating-point number first and the most significant byte last. SWAPped The instrumenet expects (with setting commands) and sends (with queries) the most significant byte of each IEEE754 floating-point number first and the least significant byte last.
  • Page 552 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A HCOPy Subsystem Parameters: <Sregister> ASCii|BINary|HEXadecimal|OCTal ASCii The register content is returned as a decimal number. BINary The register content is returned as a binary number. #B is placed in front of the number. HEXadecimal The register content is returned as a hexadecimal number.

  • Page 553: Hcopy Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A HCOPy Subsystem ................540 :HCOPy:PRINter:PAGE:ORIentation ..................540 :HCOPy:PRINter:PAGE:SIZE ..................540 :HCOPy:PRINter:PAGE:UNIT :HCOPy:DATA? The commands transfers the hardcopy data directly as a NByte stream to the remote client. Return values: <Data> string Example: HCOP:DEV:LANG JPG HCOP:DATA? transfers the hardcopy to the remote client.

  • Page 554: Hcopy[:Execute]

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A HCOPy Subsystem :HCOPy[:EXECute] The command triggers the generation of a hardcopy. The data is either written into a file or sent to the selected printer. HCOP Example: triggers the generation of a hardcopy of the current display.

  • Page 555: Hcopy:file[:Name]:Auto:directory

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A HCOPy Subsystem :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory <Directory> This command defines the directory into which the hardcopy files will be stored if auto naming is activated (HCOP:FILE:AUTO:STAT ON).The directory will be created if it does not exist yet.

  • Page 556: Hcopy:file[:Name]:Auto[:File]:Day

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A HCOPy Subsystem Example: HCOP:DEV:LANG BMP selects output format *.bmp. HCOP:FILE:AUTO:DIR 'E:/HCopy' defines the destination directory 'E:/HCopy' HCOP:FILE:AUTO:PREF 'gen' the file name starts with the prefix 'gen'. The usage of automatic naming with prefix and date in the file name is preset (…:STAT ON).

  • Page 557: Hcopy:file[:Name]:Auto[:File]:Number

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A HCOPy Subsystem Usage: Query only :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:MONTh:STATe <State> This command activates the usage of the month in the automatic file name. Parameters: <State> 0|1|OFF|ON *RST: Example: HCOP:FILE:AUTO:MONT:STAT OFF deactivates the usage of the month in the automatic file name.

  • Page 558: Hcopy:file[:Name]:Auto[:File]:Year

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A HCOPy Subsystem Example: HCOP:FILE:AUTO:PREF:STAT OFF deactivates the usage of the prefix in the automatic file name. :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:YEAR? This command queries the year in the date part in the automatic file name. Return values: <Year>...

  • Page 559: Hcopy:printer:list

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A HCOPy Subsystem Example: HCOP:IMAG:FORM XPM selects the image format XPM. :HCOPy:IMAGe:SIZE <Size> The command selects the image size of the hardcopy. The first value of the size setting defines the width, the second value the height of the image.

  • Page 560: Kboard Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A KBOard Subsystem Example: HCOP:PRIN:PAGE:UNIT IN sets the physical unit for the page layout values to inches. HCOP:PRIN:PAGE:MARG 2.5,2.0,1.5,1.5 sets the margin values of the page layout to top=2.5 inches, bot- tom=2.0 inches, left=1.5 inches and right=.1.5 inches.

  • Page 561: Mmemory Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A MMEMory Subsystem ......................541 :KBOard:LAYout :KBOard:LANGuage <Language> This command selects the keyboard language. The assignment of some keys depends on the selected language. Parameters: <Language> US|DE *RST: Example: KBO:LANG US selects keyboard language American English.

  • Page 562: File Naming Conventions

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A MMEMory Subsystem 7.12.1 File Naming Conventions To enable files in different file systems to be used, the following file naming conventions should be observed. The file name can be of any length and no distinction is made between uppercase and lowercase letters.

  • Page 563: Extensions For User Files

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A MMEMory Subsystem 7.12.2 Extensions for User Files The following table list all available file extensions for user files. The currently available files on the instrument depends on the installed options. Table 7-1: List of the automatically assigned file extensions in the instrument...
  • Page 564 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A MMEMory Subsystem Function/Digital List type Contents File suffix Standard "3GPP FDD" Settings Complete setting of the 3GPP (FDD) menu *.3g Settings Channel coding enhanced DPCH channels (downlink) 3g_ccod_dl_s Settings Channel coding enhanced DPDCH channels *.3g_ccod_ul...

  • Page 565: Remote Control Commands

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A MMEMory Subsystem Function/Digital List type Contents File suffix Standard Settings XM-Radio TWTA Data *.twta "DVB" Settings Complete setting of the DVB menu *.dvb Settings DVB Transport Stream *.gts *.ts *.trp "DAB/T-DMB" Settings Complete setting of the DAB/T-DMB menu *.dab...

  • Page 566: Mmemory:catalog:length

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A MMEMory Subsystem Return values: <path> <used_memory>,<free_memory>,<file_name>,<file_entry>,... <used_memory> Total amount of storage currently used in the directory, in bytes. <free_memory> Total amount of storage available in the directory, in bytes. <file_entry> All files of the directory are listed with their file name, format and size in bytes.

  • Page 567: Mmemory:cdirectory

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A MMEMory Subsystem :MMEMory:CDIRectory <Cdirectory> Changes the default directory for mass memory storage. The directory is used for all subsequent MMEM commands if no path is specified with them. It is also possible to change to a higher directory using two dots '..' .

  • Page 568: Mmemory:dcatalog

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A MMEMory Subsystem :MMEMory:DATA <file_name>[,<binary block data>] :MMEMory:DATA? <file_name> Writes the block data <binary block data> to the file identified by <file_name>. The IEC/ IEEE-bus terminator should be set to EOI in order to ensure correct data transfer.

  • Page 569: Mmemory:dcatalog:length

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A MMEMory Subsystem :MMEMory:DCATalog:LENGth? [<path_name>] Returns the number of subdirectories in the current or specified directory. Return values: <file_entry_count> Number of parent and subdirectories. Query parameters: <path_name> String parameter to specify the directory. If the directory is omitted, the command queries the contents of the current directory, to be queried with MMEM:CDIR command.

  • Page 570: Mmemory:mdirectory

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A MMEMory Subsystem Example: *SAV 4 stores the current instrument setting in an intermediate memory with number 4. This setting can be called using command *RCL and the associated number of the memory, e.g. *RCL 4.

  • Page 571: Mmemory:rdirectory

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A MMEMory Subsystem Usage: Setting only SCPI conform :MMEMory:MSIS <Msis> The command sets the drive (or network resource in the case of networks) using msus (MSIS = Mass Storage Identification String). This setting is effective for all MMEMory commands where the drive is not explicitly specified in the parameter.

  • Page 572: Output:Afixed:range:lower

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A OUTPut Subsystem Example: *SAV 4 stores the current instrument setting in an intermediate memory with number 4. This setting can be called using command *RCL and the associated number of the memory, e.g. *RCL 4.

  • Page 573: Output:Afixed:range:upper

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A OUTPut Subsystem Return values: <Lower> float Default unit: Example: OUTP:AFIX:RANG:LOW queries the minimum level for the FIXed setting. Example: Response: The minimum level is -50 dBm. Usage: Query only :OUTPut<hw>:AFIXed:RANGe:UPPer? The command queries the maximum level which can be set without the attenuator being adjusted (Attenuator FIXed).

  • Page 574: Output:Blank:list:state

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A OUTPut Subsystem Parameters: <Amode> AUTO|FIXed | NORMal|HPOWer AUTO The electronically switching attenuator switches with a 5 dB step width at fixed switching points. With option High Power: The level settings are made in the area of the electronically switching attenuator as well as the relay- switched option.

  • Page 575: Output:Impedance

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A OUTPut Subsystem Parameters: <Polarity> NORMal|INVerted *RST: NORMal Example: OUTP:BLAN:POL NORM :OUTPut<hw>:IMPedance? The command queries the impedance of the RF outputs. This permits converting the output level between units V and W. The impedances cannot be changed.

  • Page 576: Output:Protection:tripped

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A OUTPut Subsystem Parameters: <State> 0|1|OFF|ON *RST: Example: OUTP:PROT:STAT ON attenuates the RF Output signal for about 40 dB. Usage: SCPI conform :OUTPut<hw>:PROTection:TRIPped? The command queries the state of the protective circuit. Return values: <Tripped>...

  • Page 577: Output:user:Source

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SENSe, READ and INITiate Subsystems Example: OUTP:PON OFF RF output A is deactivated when the instrument is switched on. :OUTPut:USER<ch>:SOURce <Source> The command selects the signal for the specified USER interface. Some signals which can be applied at the USER interface are permanently assigned and some are assigned using a dedicated command (e.g.
  • Page 578 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SENSe, READ and INITiate Subsystems ............559 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:DISPlay:PERManent:PRIority ..............560 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:LENGth:AUTO ..............560 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:LENGth[:USER] ................561 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio ..............561 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio:MTIMe ................561 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:SONCe .................562 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:TYPE ...................562 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FREQuency ..................563 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet ................563 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet:STATe ..................563 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SNUMber ..................564 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SOURce ................564 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:STATus[:DEVice] ..................564 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SVERsion ....................565 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:TYPE...

  • Page 579: Sense[:Power]:Display:permanent:priority

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SENSe, READ and INITiate Subsystems Example: SENS:UNIT DBM selects unit dBm for presentation of measurement result. READ1? queries the measurement result of the sensor connected to the SENSOR interface. Response: -45.6246576745440230 -45.6 dBm were measured at the given frequency.

  • Page 580: Sense[:Power]:Filter:length:auto

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SENSe, READ and INITiate Subsystems Parameters: <Priority> AVERage|PEAK *RST: AVERage Example: SENS1:DISP:PERM:STAT ON the permanent viewer is switched on. SENS1:DISP:PERM:PRI AVER the measured average power is indicated. SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:LENGth:AUTO? The command queries the current filter length for auto filter mode (:SENSe<[1]...3>:POWer:FILTer:TYPE AUTO)

  • Page 581: Sense[:Power]:Filter:nsratio

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SENSe, READ and INITiate Subsystems SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio <Nsratio> The command defines the noise content for fixed noise filter mode (:SENSe<[1]...3>:POWer:FILTer:TYPE NSRation). This value determines the proportion of intrinsic noise in the measured result. Parameters: <Nsratio>...

  • Page 582: Sense[:Power]:Filter:type

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SENSe, READ and INITiate Subsystems Example: SENS:FILT:TYPE USER selects user filter mode. SENS:FILT:SONC activates the search for the optimum filter length. SENS:FILT:LENG? returns the found optimum filter length. Response: 128 Usage: Event SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:TYPE <Type>...

  • Page 583: Sense[:Power]:Offset

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SENSe, READ and INITiate Subsystems Example: SENS:SOUR USER selects user-defined source. SENS:FREQ 2.44 GHz enters the RF frequency of the source which is 2.44 GHz. SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet <Offset> The command enters a level offset which is added to the measured level value after activation with command SENSe[:POWer]:OFFSet:STATe ON.

  • Page 584: Sense[:Power]:Source

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SENSe, READ and INITiate Subsystems SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SOURce <Source> The command selects the signal source for the measurement. In case of two-path instruments, the RF signal of path A or path B or a user defined source can be selected.

  • Page 585: Sense[:Power]:Type

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SENSe, READ and INITiate Subsystems SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:TYPE? The command queries the type of sensor. The type is automatically detected. In case of two-path instruments, the sensor connected at the selected port is queried. Return values: <Type>...

  • Page 586: Source Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem 7.15 SOURce Subsystem The SOURce subsystem contains the commands for configuring the digital and analog signals. SOURce<hw> For one-path instruments, the keyword SOURce is optional and can be omitted. The numeric suffix to SOURce distinguishes between multicarrier generation for path A and path B in the case of two-path instruments: ●...

  • Page 587: Source:am Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem 7.15.1 SOURce:AM Subsystem The AM subsystem contains the commands for checking the amplitude modulation and also the broadband amplitude modulation. The settings for the internal modulation source (LF generator) are made in the SOURce:LFOutput subsystem.
  • Page 588 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:AM[:DEPTh] <Depth> The command sets the modulation depth of the amplitude modulation in percent. The modulation depth is limited by the maximum peak envelope power (PEP). Parameters: <Depth> float Range: 0 to 100...

  • Page 589: Source:awgn Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: AM:DEPT 50 sets a modulation depth of 50 %. AM:SENS? queries the input sensitivity at the EXT MOD input. Response: since the voltage value for full modulation is 1V, the resulting sen- sitivity is precisely 50%/V.
  • Page 590 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem ..................571 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:CNRatio ................572 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:DISP:MODE ................572 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:DISP:ORESults ..................573 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:ENRatio ..............573 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:FREQuency:RESult ..............573 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:FREQuency:TARGet ..................574 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:MODE .................574 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:POWer:CARRier ................575 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:POWer:MODE ................576 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:POWer:NOISe ..............576 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:POWer:NOISe:TOTal ................576 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:POWer:RMODe ................577 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:POWer:SUM ...............577 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:POWer:SUM:PEP ..................578 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:STATe [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:BRATe <Brate>...
  • Page 591 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:BWIDth:NOISe? Queries the real noise bandwidth. This command is available for modes Additive Noise and Noise Only (SOUR:AWGN:MODE ADD|ONLY). Return values: <Noise> float Example: AWGN:BWID:NOIS? queries the noise bandwidth. Usage: Query only [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:BWIDth:RATio <Ratio>...
  • Page 592 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Cnratio> float Range: -50.00 to 40.00 Increment: 0.01 *RST: Default unit: Example: AWGN:CNR 10 sets a carrier/noise ratio of 10 dB. [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:DISP:MODE <Mode> Selects the display mode to Bseband or RF.
  • Page 593 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:ENRatio <Enratio> This command sets the ratio of bit energy to noise power density in "Additive Noise" mode. Depending on the selected reference mode either the noise level (AWGN:POW:RMOD NOISe) or the carrier level (AWGN:POW:RMOD CARRier) is adjusted to the set E ratio.
  • Page 594 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Target> float Range: 0 Hz to 50 MHz Increment: 0.07 Hz *RST: 0 Hz Example: AWGN:FREQ:TARG 2kHz sets a frequency of 2 kHz for the interfering sine. [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:MODE <Mode> This command selects the mode for generating the interfering signal.
  • Page 595 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Carrier> float Range: min to 20 Increment: 0.01 *RST: Default unit: Example: AWGN:DISP:MODE RF sets the display mode to RF AWGN:POW:CARR? queries the carrier level [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:POWer:MODE <Mode> This command selects the mode for setting the noise level.
  • Page 596 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:POWer:NOISe <Noise> Available for modes Additive Noise, Noise Only and CW Interferer (SOUR:AWGN:MODE ADD|ONLY|CW). This command sets or queries the noise level in the system bandwidth depending on the selected modes: ●...
  • Page 597 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Rmode> CARRier|NOISe CARRier The carrier level is kept constant when the C/N value or Eb/N0 value is changed. The noise level is adjusted. NOISe The noise level is kept constant when the C/N value or Eb/N0 value is changed.

  • Page 598: Source:bb Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Usage: Query only [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:STATe <State> This command activates or deactivates the white noise (AWGN = Averaged White Gaus- sian Noise). The noise signal is either superimposed on the baseband signal ("Additive Noise" mode (SOUR:AWGN:MODE ADD)) or is output as a pure noise signal ("Noise Only"...
  • Page 599 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem ..................580 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:POFFset ....................580 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ROUTe [:SOURce]:BB:PATH:COUNt? The command queries the number of installed baseband paths. Return values: <Count> integer Example: PATH:COUN? queries the number of baseband paths. Response:1 The instrument is equipped with one baseband path.
  • Page 600 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Pgain> float Increment: 0.1 dB *RST: 0 dB Example: BB:PGA 3dB sets a relative path gain of 3 dB for the baseband signal of path A compared to the baseband signal of path B.

  • Page 601: Common Settings

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem 7.15.3.2 SOURce:BB:ARB Subsystem The ARB subsystem contains the commands for setting the ARB Generator. Settings for clock and trigger interfaces and for external outputs are entered in the SOURce:INPut and SOURce:OUTput subsystems.

  • Page 602: Clock Settings

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: BB:ARB:WAV:SEL 'wave1' loads waveform file wave1.wv from the default directory. BB:ARB:TRIG:SEQ RETR sets trigger mode Retrigger. BB:ARB:STAT ON switches on the ARB generator. The selected waveform is output straight away. A trigger event causes signal output to restart.

  • Page 603: Trigger Settings

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: BB:ARB:CLOC:MODE SAMP selects clock type "Sample", i.e. the supplied clock is a sample clock. [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:CLOCk:MULTiplier <Multiplier> The command specifies the multiplier for clock type "Multiple Samples" (:BB:ARB:CLOCk:MODE MSAM) in the case of an external clock source.
  • Page 604 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem ..............584 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:EXECute ........585 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:EXTernal:SYNChronize:OUTPut .............585 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:OBASeband:DELay .............586 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:OBASeband:INHibit ..........586 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut:DELay:FIXed ............586 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay ........587 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay:MAXimum ........587 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay:MINimum ..............587 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:RMODe ..............588 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:SLENgth ................588 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:SLUNit ..............589 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:SMODe ..............589 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:SOURce ..........590 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger[:EXTernal<1|2>]:DELay ..........590 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger[:EXTernal<1|2>]:INHibit ..............591 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB[:TRIGger]:SEQuence [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:ARM:EXECute...
  • Page 605 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:EXTernal:SYNChronize:OUTPut <Output> (enabled for "Trigger Source" External) Enables/disables output of the signal synchronous to the external trigger event. Parameters: <Output> 0|1|OFF|ON The signal calculation starts simultaneously with the external trigger event but because of the instrument’s processing time the first samples are cut off and no signal is outputted.
  • Page 606 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:OBASeband:INHibit <Inhibit> The command specifies the number of samples by which a restart is to be inhibited fol- lowing a trigger event. This command applies only for triggering by the second path.
  • Page 607 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Delay> float Range: 0 to 2^20-1 Increment: *RST: Default unit: Symbol Example: BB:ARB:TRIG:OUTP2:DEL 16 sets a delay of 16 samples for the signal on connector MARKER [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay:MAXimum? [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay:MINimum? The command queries the minimum marker delay for set- ting :BB:ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut:DELay:FIXed ON.
  • Page 608 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: BB:ARB:TRIG:SOUR EXT sets external triggering via the TRIGGER 1 connector. BB:ARB:TRIG:MODE ARET selects the Armed_Retrigger mode. BB:ARB:TRIG:RMOD? queries the current status of waveform output. Response: RUN the waveform is output, an external trigger was executed.
  • Page 609 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:SMODe <Smode> The command selects the extended trigger mode for multi segment waveforms. Parameters: <Smode> SAME|NEXT|NSEam|SEQuencer SAME The currently selected segment is output repeatedly. NEXT The current segment ceases to be output as soon as a new...
  • Page 610 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Source> INTernal|EXTernal | BEXTernal|OBASeband INTernal Triggering is executed by means of the Trigger command in the case of remote control, and by means of "Execute Trigger" in the case of manual operation.
  • Page 611 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Inhibit> float Range: 0 to 2^32-1 Increment: *RST: Default unit: sample Example: BB:ARB:TRIG:SOUR EXT selects an external trigger via the TRIGGER 1 connector BB:ARB:TRIG:INH 200 sets a restart inhibit for 200 samples following a trigger event.

  • Page 612: Marker Settings

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Marker Settings ............592 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:MODE ..........592 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:OFFTime ..........593 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:ONTime ..........593 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:PATTern ........593 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:PULSe:DIVider .........594 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:PULSe:FREQuency [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:MODE <Mode> The command defines the signal for the selected marker output. Parameters: <Mode> UNCHanged|RESTart|PULSe|PATTern|RATio|TRIGger UNCHanged A marker signal as defined in the waveform file (tag 'marker mode x') is generated.
  • Page 613 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:ONTime <Ontime> The command sets the number of samples in a period (ON time + OFF time) during which the marker signal in setting :ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut:MODE RATio on the marker out- puts is ON.

  • Page 614: Test Signals Settings

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:PULSe:FREQuency? The command queries the pulse frequency of the pulsed marker signal in the setting SOURce:BB:ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut:MODE PULSe. The pulse frequency is derived by dividing the symbol rate by the divider. The divider is defined with com- mand :BB:ARB:TRIG:OUTP:PULS:DIV.
  • Page 615 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TSIGnal:CIQ:CREate:NAMed <Named> [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TSIGnal:RECTangle:CREate:NAMed <Named> [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TSIGnal:SINE:CREate:NAMed <Named> Generates a signal and saves it to a waveform file. Setting parameters: <Named> <file name> Example: BB:ARB:TSIG:SINE:CRE:NAM 'sine_test' generates a test sine signal and saves it into the wavefile sine_test.
  • Page 616 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Frequency> float Increment: 0.01 Hz *RST: 1 kHz Example: BB:ARB:TSIG:RECT:FREQ 100 kHz sets the frequency of the test signal of 100 kHz. [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TSIGnal:RECTangle:OFFSet <Offset> Sets the DC component. Parameters: <Offset> float Range: -1.0 to 1.0...

  • Page 617: Source:bb:arb:mcar Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TSIGnal:SINE:PHASe <Phase> The command sets the phase offset of the sine wave on the Q channel relative to the sine wave on the I channel. Parameters: <Phase> float Range: -180.00 DEG to +180.00 DEG Increment: 0.01 DEG...
  • Page 618 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem ..........600 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CARRier<ch>:STATe ............601 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CFACtor:MODE .............601 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CLIPping:CFACtor ............602 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CLIPping:CUToff ............602 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CLIPping[:STATe] ..............603 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CLOad ..............603 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CLOCk ..............603 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CREate ........604 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:DELay:STEP ........604 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:DELay[:STARt] ..........604 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:EXECute ...........605 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:FILE ........605 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:PHASe:STEP ........606 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:PHASe[:STARt] ........606 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:POWer:STEP ........606 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:POWer[:STARt] ..........607...
  • Page 619 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CARRier:SPACing <Spacing> The command sets the frequency spacing between adjacent carriers of the multi carrier waveform. The carriers are generated symmetrically around the RF carrier. The maxi- mum carrier spacing is limited to Carrier spacing = Total baseband bandwidth /(Num- ber of carriers - 1).
  • Page 620 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: BB:ARB:MCAR:CARR15:FILE 'D:/IQ_wcdma' selects file IQ_wcdma. The data of the file is modulated onto car- rier 15. [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CARRier<ch>:PHASe <Phase> The command sets the start phase of the selected carrier. The phase settings are only valid if optimization of the crest factor is disabled (:SOURce:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CFACtor:MODE OFF).
  • Page 621 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CFACtor:MODE <Mode> The command sets the mode for optimizing the crest factor by calculating the carrier phases. Parameters: <Mode> OFF|MIN|MAX There is no automatic setting for minimizing or maximizing the crest factor. The Phase setting (command BB:ARB:MCAR:CARR:PHAS) is in use.
  • Page 622 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CLIPping:CUToff <Cutoff> Sets the cut off frequency of the final lowpass filter, if baseband clipping is enabled (BB:ARB:MCAR:CLIP:STAT ON). When the cut off frequency is set as half of the output sample rate, a final lowpass filter improves the spectrum of the clipped multicarrier signal, but may also increase the result- ing crest factor.
  • Page 623 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CLOad <Cload> This command creates a multi carrier waveform using the current entries of the carrier table. This multi carrier waveform is saved with the file name specified with command SOUR:BB:ARB:MCAR:OFIL. The file extension is *.wv. Digital standard "ARB" is acti- vated, the new multi carrier waveform is loaded and is output in accordance to the trigger settings.
  • Page 624 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Usage: Event [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:DELay:STEP <Step> The command sets the step width by which the start delays of the carriers in the defined carrier range will be incremented. Parameters: <Step> float Range: -1s to +1s...
  • Page 625 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: BB:ARB:MCAR:EDIT:CARR:STAR 4 the carrier range starts at carrier 2. BB:ARB:MCAR:EDIT:CARR:STOP 20 the carrier range stops at carrier 20. BB:ARB:MCAR:EDIT:CARR:STAT ON sets all the carriers in the carrier range (2 to 20) to ON.
  • Page 626 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:PHASe[:STARt] <Start> The command sets the start phase for the individual carriers in the defined carrier range. If the command :BB:ARB:MCAR:EDIT:CARR:PHAS:STEP is used to define a step width, the phase entered here applies only to the starting carrier. The phases of the remaining carriers are stepped up or down by the phase value specified in the :BB:ARB:MCAR:EDIT:CARR:PHAS:STEP command.
  • Page 627 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Start> float Range: -80 to 0 Increment: 0.01 *RST: Default unit: Example: BB:ARB:MCAR:EDIT:CARR:POW -50 dB sets the power of the carriers in the carrier range to -50 dB. [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:STARt <Start> [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:STOP <Stop>...
  • Page 628 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: MMEM:CDIR 'D:/user/waveform' sets the default directory to D:/user/waveform. BB:ARB:MCAR:OFIL 'mcar1_2' defines the file name mcar1_2.wv for the multi carrier waveform file [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:PRESet The command sets all ARB multi carrier parameters to their default values.
  • Page 629 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:SETTing:LOAD <Load> The command loads the settings file. If a settings file with the specified name does not yet exist, it is created. The file extension may be omitted. Only files with the file extension *.arb_multcarr will be loaded or created.

  • Page 630: Source:bb:arb:wav Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Mode> LONG|SHORt|USER LONG The resulting signal period is defined by the longest I/Q file in the carrier table. Shorter I/Q files are periodically repeated. SHORt The resulting signal period is defined by the shortest I/Q file in the carrier table.
  • Page 631 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:WAVeform:CATalog:LENGth? This command reads out the files in the default directory. The default directory is set using command MMEM:CDIRectory. When the names of the waveform files are returned they are separated by commas. Only files with the file extension *.wv will be listed.
  • Page 632 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Setting parameters: <binary data block> #<length of the length field><length field><block of binary data> # is always used to introduce the binary block, <length field> defines the number of bytes in the <block of binary data>,...
  • Page 633 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Return values: <Free> float Example: MMEM:CDIR 'D:/user/waveform' sets the default directory to D:/user/waveform. BB:ARB:WAV:FREE? queries the free disk space in directory D:/user/waveform. Usage: Query only [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:WAVeform:HDDStreaming:BLEVel? Queries the filling level of the streaming buffer.

  • Page 634: Source:bb:arb:wseg Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Return values: <Points> <waveform filename> Example: BB:ARB:WAV:POINt? queries the number of I/Q values pairs in the waveform file. Response: 401 the waveform file contains 401 I/Q values pairs. Usage: Query only [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:WAVeform:SELect <Select>...

  • Page 635: [:Source]:Bb:arb:wsegment

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Section chapter 7.3, "R&S Signal Generator Waveform and List Format", on page 496 describes the ARB waveform format and how it is used to transmit waveforms via the IEC bus................615 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:WSEGment ..............615...

  • Page 636: [:Source]:Bb:arb:wsegment:configure:ofile

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: MMEM:CDIR 'D:/user/waveform' sets the default directory to D:/user/waveform. BB:ARB:WSEG:CONF:SEL 'multi_sin' creates the configuration file multi_sin.inf_mswv in the default directory. BB:ARB:WSEG:CONF:SEGM:APP 'sinus1' includes waveform sinus1.wv as segment 1 in the configuration file. The waveform must be available in the default directory.

  • Page 637: [:Source]:Bb:arb:wsegment:configure:segment:catalog

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: MMEM:CDIR 'D:/user/waveform' sets the default directory to D:/user/waveform. BB:ARB:WSEG:CONF:SEL 'new' creates the configuration file new.inf_mswv in the default direc- tory. BB:ARB:WSEG:CONF:SEGM:APP 'arb1' appends waveform arb1.wv to configuration file new. Waveform arb1 will be the first segment of a multi segment waveform cre- ated with configuration file new.

  • Page 638: [:Source]:Bb:arb:wsegment:name

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: MMEM:CDIR 'D:/user/waveform' sets the default directory to D:/user/waveform. BB:ARB:WSEG:CONF:SEL 'new' creates the configuration file new.inf_mswv in the default direc- tory. BB:ARB:WSEG:CONF:SEGM:APP 'arb1.wv' 'includes waveform arb1.wv as segment 1 in the configuration file.

  • Page 639: [:Source]:Bb:arb:wsegment:next:execute

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: MMEM:CDIR 'D:/user/waveform' sets the default directory to root/user/waveform. BB:ARB:WSEG:NEXT 2 selects segment 2 to be output. BB:ARB:TRIG:SMOD NEXT selects extended trigger mode next, i.e. the segment specified with command :BB:ARB:WSEG:NEXT will be output.

  • Page 640: [:Source]:Bb:arb:wsegment:sequence:select

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Setting parameters: <State> ON|OFF activates/deactivates the appended segment *RST: <Segment> integer indicates the number of the segment as in the multi segment waveform file Range: 0 to SegmentCount - 1 Increment: *RST: <Count>...

  • Page 641: Common Settings

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem 7.15.3.3 SOURce:BB:DM Subsystem The commands in the SOURce:BB:DM subsystem are described in two sections, sepa- rated into configuring digital modulation and lists for digital modulation. DM General Remote-Control Commands The following section contains the commands for generating the digital modulation signal.

  • Page 642: [:Source]:Bb:dm:preset

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Length> 9|11|15|16|20|21|23 *RST: Example: BB:DM:SOUR PRBS The internal pseudo-random generator is used as the data source. BB:DM:PRBS 9 An internal pseudo-random sequence of 511 bits will be gener- ated. [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:PRESet The command calls the default settings for digital modulation.

  • Page 643: [:Source]:Bb:dm:srate

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: BB:DM:SOUR DLIS the internal data generator is used. BB:DM:DLIS:SEL 'test' the data list test.dm_iqd is used. [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:SRATe <Srate> The command sets the symbol rate. The value range is dependent on the selected mod- ulation type.

  • Page 644: Clock Settings

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:STATe <State> The command enables or disables digital modulation. Switching on digital modulation turns off all the other digital standards. Enabling digital modulation (BB:DM:STAT ON) turns off all the other standards. In case of two-path instruments, this affects the same path.
  • Page 645 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:CLOCk:MODE <Mode> The command enters the type of externally supplied clock (:BB:DM:CLOCk:SOURce EXTernal). The bit clock and the symbol clock differ only in the case of modulations that have more than two states, i.e. that require more than one bit for encoding each state. When MSYMbol is used, a multiple of the symbol clock is supplied via the CLOCK connector and the symbol clock is derived internally from this.

  • Page 646: Trigger Settings

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:CLOCk:SOURce <Source> The command selects the source for the digital modulation clock. For two-path instruments, selecting COUPLed and EXTernal is only possible for path A, since the external clock source is permanently allocated to path A; clock source AINT is only allowed for path B.
  • Page 647 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: BB:DM:TRIG:SOUR INT sets internal triggering. BB:DM:TRIG:SEQ ARET sets Armed_Retrigger mode, i.e. every trigger event causes signal generation to restart. BB:DM:TRIG:EXEC executes a trigger, signal generation is started. BB:DM:TRIG:ARM:EXEC signal generation is stopped.
  • Page 648 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Output> 0|1|OFF|ON The signal calculation starts simultaneously with the external trigger event but because of the instrument’s processing time the first samples are cut off and no signal is outputted. After elapsing of the internal processing time, the output signal is synchronous to the trigger event.
  • Page 649 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Inhibit> float Range: 0 to 2^26-1 Symbols Increment: 1 symbol *RST: 0 symbols Default unit: symbol Example: BB:DM:TRIG:SOUR OBAS sets for path A the internal trigger executed by the trigger signal from the second path (path B).
  • Page 650 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay:MINimum? [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay:MAXimum? The command queries the maximum marker delay for set- ting :BB:DM:TRIG:OUTP:DEL:FIX ON. Return values: <Maximum> float Example: BB:DM:TRIG:OUTP:DEL:FIX ON restricts the marker signal delay setting range to the dynamic range.
  • Page 651 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Slength> float Range: 1 to (2^32-1) Symbols *RST: 1000 symbols Default unit: symbol Example: BB:DM:SEQ SING sets trigger mode Single. BB:DM:TRIG:SLEN 200 sets a sequence length of 200 symbols. 200 symbols will be output after the next trigger event.
  • Page 652 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Delay> float Range: 0 to 2^16-1 Symbols Increment: 1 symbol for :BB:DM:CLOC:SOUR EXT, 0.01 sym- bols for :BB:DM:CLOC:SOUR INT *RST: 0 symbols Default unit: symbol BB:DM:TRIG:SOUR EXT Example: selects an external trigger via the TRIGGER 1 connector.

  • Page 653: Marker Settings

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Sequence> AUTO|RETRigger|AAUTo|ARETrigger|SINGle AUTO The modulation signal is generated continuously. RETRigger The modulation signal is generated continuously. A trigger event (internal or external) causes a restart. AAUTO The modulation signal is generated only when a trigger event occurs.
  • Page 654 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Mode> CLISt|PULSe|PATTern|RATio|TRIGger CLISt A marker signal that is defined in the selected control list is generated. PULSe A pulsed marker signal is generated. The pulse frequency (= symbol rate/divider) is defined with the...
  • Page 655 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:ONTime <Ontime> The command sets the number of symbols in a period (ON time + OFF time) during which the marker signal in setting SOURce:BB:DM:TRIGger:OUTPut:MODE RATio on the marker outputs is ON.

  • Page 656: Filter Settings

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: BB:DM:TRIG:OUTP2:PULS:DIV 2 sets the divider to 2 for the marker signal on output MARKER 2. BB:DM:TRIG:OUTP2:FREQ? queries the resulting pulse frequency of the marker signal. Response: 66 000 the resulting pulse frequency is 66 kHz.
  • Page 657 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: BB:DM:FILT:OSAM 32 sets the upsampling factor to 32. [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:FILTer:OSAMpling:AUTO <Auto> The command activates/deactivates the upsampling factor state. If activated, the most sensible parameter values are selected. The value depends on the coherence check. If deactivated, the values can be changed manually.
  • Page 658 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Apco25> Range: 0.05 to 0.99 Increment: 0.01 *RST: 0.20 <Cosine> Range: 0.0 to 0.99 Increment: 0.01 *RST: 0.35 <Gauss> Range: 0.15 to 2.5 Increment: 0.01 *RST: <Lpass> Range: 0.05 to 2.0 Increment: 0.01...

  • Page 659: Modulation Settings

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Type> RCOSine|COSine|GAUSs|LGAuss|CONE|COF705| COEQualizer|COFequalizer|C2K3x|APCO25|SPHase| RECTangle|USER|PGAuss|LPASs|LPASSEVM|DIRac| ENPShape|EWPShape|LTEFilter *RST: GAUSs Example: BB:DM:FILT:TYPE COS selects the Cosine filter type. Modulation Settings ................639 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:AQPSk:ANGLe ................639 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:ASK:DEPTh ..................640 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:CODing ..................640 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:FORMat ................641 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:FSK:DEViation .........641 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:FSK:VARiable:SYMBol<ch>:DEViation ..............641 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:FSK:VARiable:TYPE ..................642...
  • Page 660 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: BB:DM:FORM ASK selects the ASK modulation type. BB:DM:ASK:DEPT 50 PCT sets a modulation depth of 50 percent. [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:CODing <Coding> The command selects the modulation coding. If the modulation type selected (:BB:DM:FORM) is not possible with the coding that has been set, it is automatically set to OFF (:BB:DM:COD OFF).
  • Page 661 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:FSK:DEViation <Deviation> The command sets the frequency deviation when FSK modulation is selected. The range of values depends on the symbol rate that is set (see data sheet) and the maximum deviation is 10 MHz.

  • Page 662: Power Ramp

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: BB:DM:FORM FSKV selects Variable FSK modulation. BB:DM:FSK:VAR:TYPE FSK16 selects 16FSK modulation. [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:MDELay? The command queries the digital modulation delay from the data input to the I/Q output in the case of external modulation.
  • Page 663 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:PRAMp:BBONly[:STATe] <State> This command selects power ramping in the baseband only or mixed power ramping in the baseband and the RF section. The ON setting is mandatory if, with power ramping active, only the baseband signal is...
  • Page 664 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:PRAMp:SHAPe <Shape> The command sets the edge shape of the ramp envelope. Parameters: <Shape> LINear|COSine *RST: COSine Example: BB:DM:PRAM:SHAP COS selects a cosine-shaped rise and fall for the transmitted power edge. [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:PRAMp:SOURce <Source>...
  • Page 665 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <State> 0|1|OFF|ON *RST: Example: BB:DM:PRAM:STAT ON switches power ramping on. DM Lists The following section brings together the commands for defining and managing the data lists and control lists for digital modulation.

  • Page 666: [:Source]:Bb:dm:clist:catalog

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem ..............650 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:DLISt:DATA:APPend ................651 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:DLISt:DELete ................651 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:DLISt:POINts ................652 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:DLISt:SELect ................652 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:FLISt:DELete ................652 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:FLISt:POINts ................653 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:FLISt:SELect ................653 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:MLISt:DELete ................653 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:MLISt:POINts ................654 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:MLISt:SELect ...............654 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:SETTing:CATalog ................654 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:SETTing:DELete ................655 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:SETTing:LOAD ................655 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:SETTing:STORe ............655 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:STANdard:ULISt:CATalog .............656 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:STANdard:ULISt:DELete ...............656...

  • Page 667: [:Source]:Bb:dm:clist:copy

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: BB:DM:FORM USER selects the User modulation type. BB:DM:FLIS:FREE? queries the free memory. Usage: Query only [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:CLISt:COPY <Copy> [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:DLISt:COPY <Copy> The command copies the selected data list into the data list specified by <list name>. If a data list with the specified name already exists, it is overwritten.
  • Page 668 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:CLISt:DATA <Data> The command sends the data to the currently selected control list. If the list already con- tains data, it is overwritten. This command only writes data into the data section of the file.
  • Page 669 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Setting parameters: <Delete> <list name> Example: BB:DM:CLIS:DEL 'c_list3' deletes control list c_list3. Usage: Setting only [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:CLISt:POINts? The command queries the number of lines (2 bytes) in the currently selected list. Return values: <Points>...

  • Page 670: [:Source]:Bb:dm:dlist:data:append

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:DLISt:DATA <Data> The Setting command sends the bit data to the data list selected with the aid of :BB:DM:DLISt:SELect. Any existing content in the data list is overwritten. This command only writes data into the data section of the file.

  • Page 671: [:Source]:Bb:dm:dlist:delete

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Setting parameters: <Append> 0 | 1 {,0 | 1 }.| block data Example: BB:DM:DLIS:SEL ' d_list2' selects data list d_list2. FORM ASC selects ASCII data transmission format. BB:DM:DLIS:DATA:APP 1,1,1,0,0,0,1,1,0,1... adds the specified numeric data to the existing data in data list d_list2.

  • Page 672: [:Source]:Bb:dm:dlist:select

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:DLISt:SELect <Select> The command selects the data list in the default directory. The default directory is set using command MMEM:CDIRectory. A path can also be specified, in which case the files in the specified directory are selected. If a data list with the specified name does not yet exist, it is created.

  • Page 673: [:Source]:Bb:dm:flist:select

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:FLISt:SELect <Select> The command selects the user-defined filter (*.vaf). The directory applicable to the following command is defined with the command MMEM:CDIRectory. To access the files in this directory, only the file name is required, without the path and the file extension.

  • Page 674: [:Source]:Bb:dm:mlist:select

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:MLISt:SELect <Select> The command selects the user mapping list in the default directory. The default directory is set using command MMEM:CDIRectory. A path can also be specified, in which case the files in the specified directory are selected. If a user mapping list with the specified name does not yet exist, it is created.

  • Page 675: [:Source]:Bb:dm:setting:load

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:SETTing:LOAD <Load> This command loads the selected file with Custom Digital Modulation settings. The direc- tory is set using command MMEM:CDIRectory. A path can also be specified, in which case the files in the specified directory are read. The file extension may be omitted. Only files with the file extension *.dm will be loaded.

  • Page 676: [:Source]:Bb:dm:standard:ulist:delete

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:STANdard:ULISt:DELete <Delete> This command deletes the selected file with Digital Standard settings. The directory is set using command MMEM:CDIRectory. A path can also be specified, in which case the files in the specified directory are read. The file extension may be omitted. Only files with the file extension *.dm_stu will be deleted.
  • Page 677 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem ..............658 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:GRAPhics:SRATe:USER ................658 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:GRAPhics:STATe .............658 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:GRAPhics:TRIGger:SOURce [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:GRAPhics:MODE <Mode> Selects the graphical signal display. Parameters: <Mode> IQ|VECTor|CCDF|PSPectrum|CONStellation|EYEI|EYEQ *RST: Example: BB:GRAP:MODE VECT selects vector diagram. [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:GRAPhics:SMARt:STATe <State> Activates/deactivates the "smart graphics". Parameters: <State> 0|1|OFF|ON...
  • Page 678 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:GRAPhics:SRATe:USER <User> (Enabled for BB:GRAPH:SRAT:MODE USER) Selects the signal bandwidth for which the display is to be generated. The setting range moves between the minimum and maximum bandwidth which is possible for the selected display.

  • Page 679: Source:bb:impairment Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Source> SOFTware|MARKer SOFTware Recording of signals is started automatically in specified intervals. This asynchronous method is appropriate when a representative display of the complete signal is desired, as recording starts in a random time reference to the signal.
  • Page 680 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem ............667 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:QUADrature[:ANGLe] ................667 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:STATe [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:IQRatio <Iqratio> This command sets the ratio of I modulation to Q modulation (amplification “imbalance”). The input may be either in dB or %. The resolution is 0.001 dB, an input in percent is rounded to the closest valid value in dB.
  • Page 681 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: BB:IMP:LEAK:Q 3 PCT sets the leakage for the Q-component to 3 percent. [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:OPTimization:MODE <Mode> This command sets the optimization mode. Parameters: <Mode> FAST|QHIGh | UCORrection FAST Optimization is reached by compensation for I/Q skew.
  • Page 682 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: SOURce:BB:IMP:OPT:UCOR:ACC? queries the accuracy of the frequency response correction data. Response: LOW | NORMal | HIGH Usage: Query only [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:OPTimization:UCORrection:BWIDth? Note: Bandwidth of the user correction data is only indicated if the instrument is equipped with an R&S SMx-K63 and external devices are enabled.
  • Page 683 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Return values: <Edevices> 0|1|OFF|ON The parameters bandwidth, frequency offset and level offset are displayed. The parameters bandwidth, frequency offset and level offset are not indicated Example: SOUR:BB:IMP:OPT:UCOR:EDEV? queries the status of the parameter external devices.
  • Page 684 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Return values: <Status> OK|MISSing|INCompatible|CORRupt File type and data of the correction file are ok. The file can be used for frequency response correction. MISS File not found. The file is not compatible with the instrument or the path and could not be loaded.
  • Page 685 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Usage: Query only [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:OPTimization:UCORrection:FREQuency: OFFSet? Note: Frequency offset of the user correction data is only indicated if the instrument is equipped with an R&S SMx-K63 and external devices are enabled. The command displays the frequency offset value of the frequency response correction data.
  • Page 686 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Usage: Query only [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:OPTimization:UCORrection:LEVel:MIN? Note: Level values of the user correction data are only indicated if the instrument is equipped with an R&S SMx-K63. The command displays the minimum level value of the baseband frequency response correction data.

  • Page 687: Source:bb:mccw Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:QUADrature[:ANGLe] <Angle> This command sets the quadrature offset for the digital I/Q signal. Parameters: <Angle> float Range: -10 to 10 Increment: 0.02 *RST: Default unit: Example: BB:IMP:QUAD:ANGL -5DEG sets the quadrature offset to -5 degrees.
  • Page 688 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem ..........675 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:EDIT:CARRier:POWer:STEP ..........675 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:EDIT:CARRier:POWer[:STARt] ............676 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:EDIT:CARRier:STARt ............676 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:EDIT:CARRier:STATe .............676 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:EDIT:CARRier:STOP [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:STATe <State> The command turns on the Multi Carrier CW signal. Any other digital standards or digital modulation that may be in the ON state will be automatically turned OFF.
  • Page 689 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:CARRier:LIST:PHASe <Phase#0>[,<Phase#1>,...] [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:CARRier:LIST:PHASe? [start[,count]] The command sets the start phase of the carrier with the aid of a value list. The first value in the list is assigned to the carrier with index 0, the second value to the carrier with index 1, etc.
  • Page 690 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Power#0>[,<Power# string 1>,...] Range: -80 dB to 0 dB Increment: 0.01 dB *RST: 0 dB Query parameters: [start[,count]] string If the query is expanded by using the two parameters <start> and <count>, the value list is read out in smaller sections.
  • Page 691 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:CARRier:PHASe <CarrierIndex>,<Phase> [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:CARRier:PHASe? <CarrierIndex> The command sets the start phase of the selected carrier. The phase settings are only valid if optimization of the crest factor is disabled (:SOURce:BB:MCCW:CFACtor:MODE OFF). Setting parameters: <Phase>...
  • Page 692 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:CARRier:SPACing <Spacing> The command sets the carrier spacing. The carriers are generated symmetrically around the center carrier. The total bandwidth is calculated as ("Number of carriers" - 1) * "Carrier spacing "and must not exceed the system bandwidth of the instrument (see data sheet).
  • Page 693 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Cfactor> float Range: 0 dB to 100 dB Increment: 0.01 dB *RST: 3 dB Example: BB:MCCW:CFAC:MODE SLOW sets the Target Crest optimization mode. BB:MCCW:CFAC 10 dB sets the desired crest factor to 10 dB.
  • Page 694 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: BB:MCCW:CLOC? queries the output clock rate. Response: 256 000 000 the output clock rate is 256 MHz. Usage: Query only [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:EDIT:CARRier:EXECute The command adopts the settings for the carrier range which has been defined using the :BB:MCCW:EDIT:CARR:...
  • Page 695 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:EDIT:CARRier:PHASe[:STARt] <Start> The command sets the start phase for the individual carriers in the defined carrier range. If the command :BB:MCCW:EDIT:CARR:PHAS:STEP is used to define a step width, the phase entered here applies only to the starting carrier. The phases of the remaining car- riers are stepped up or down by the phase value specified in the :BB:MCCW:EDIT:CARR:PHAS:STEP command.
  • Page 696 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Start> float Range: -80 dB to 0 dB Increment: 0.01 dB *RST: 0 dB Example: BB:MCCW:EDIT:CARR:POW -50 dB sets the power of the carrier to -50 dB. [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:EDIT:CARRier:STARt <CarrierIndex> The command selects the first carrier in the carrier range to which the settings with the :BB:MCCW:EDIT:CARR:...
  • Page 697 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem ..........677 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:TRIGger:OBASeband:DELay ..........678 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:TRIGger:OBASeband:INHibit ..............678 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:TRIGger:RMODe ..............679 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:TRIGger:SLENgth ..............679 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:TRIGger:SOURce ..........679 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:TRIGger[:EXTernal<ch>]:DELay ..........680 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:TRIGger[:EXTernal<ch>]:INHibit ......680 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:TRIGger[:EXTernal<ch>]:SYNChronize:OUTPut .............680 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW[:TRIGger]:SEQuence [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:TRIGger:ARM:EXECute Stops signal generation for trigger modes "Armed Auto" and "Armed Retrigger". A sub- sequent internal or external trigger event restart signal generation.
  • Page 698 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: BB:MCCW:TRIG:SOUR OBAS sets for path A the internal trigger executed by the trigger signal from the second path (path B). BB:MCCW:TRIG:OBAS:DEL 50 sets a delay of 50 symbols for the trigger.
  • Page 699 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:TRIGger:SLENgth <Slength> Defines the length of the signal sequence in frames to be output in the "Single" trigger mode (SOUR:BB:MCCW:SEQ SING). Parameters: <Slength> Range: 1 to 10000 *RST: Default unit: frames Example: BB:MCCW:SEQ SING sets trigger mode Single.
  • Page 700 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Delay> Range: 0 to 2^32-1 *RST: Example: BB:MCCW:TRIG:SOUR EXT selects an external trigger via the TRIGGER 1 connector. BB:MCCW:TRIG:DEL 50 sets a delay of 50 symbols for the trigger. [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:TRIGger[:EXTernal<ch>]:INHibit <Inhibit>...
  • Page 701 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Sequence> AUTO|RETRigger|AAUTo|ARETrigger|SINGle AUTO The modulation signal is generated continuously. RETRigger The modulation signal is generated continuously. A trigger event (internal or external) causes a restart. AAUTo The modulation signal is generated only when a trigger event occurs.
  • Page 702 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:TRIGger:OUTPut:DELay:FIXed <Fixed> The command restricts the marker delay setting range to the dynamic range. In this range the delay can be set without restarting the marker and signal. If a delay is entered in setting ON but is outside this range, the maximum possible delay is set and an error message is generated.
  • Page 703 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Usage: Query only [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay:MINimum? The command queries the minimum marker delay for set- ting :BB:MCCW:TRIGger:OUTPut:DELay:FIXed ON. Return values: <Minimum> float Example: BB:MCCW:TRIG:OUTP:DEL:FIX ON restricts the marker signal delay setting range to the dynamic range.
  • Page 704 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:ONTime <OnTime> [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:OFFTime <OffTime> Sets the number of symbols/samples in a period (ON time + OFF time) during which the marker signal in setting SOURce:BB:MCCW:TRIGger:OUTPut:MODE RATio on the marker outputs is OFF.
  • Page 705 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:PULSe:FREQuency? Queries the pulse frequency of the pulsed marker signal in the set- ting :BB:MCCW:TRIGger:OUTPut:MODE PULSe. The pulse frequency is derived by dividing the symbol/sample rate by the divider. The divider is defined with com- mand :BB:MCCW:TRIG:OUTP:PULS:DIV.

  • Page 706: Source:bb:measurement Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:CLOCk:MULTiplier <Multiplier> The command specifies the multiplier for clock type Multiple in the case of an external clock source. For two-path instruments, the only numerical suffix allowed for SOURce is 1, since the external clock source is permanently allocated to path A.
  • Page 707 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MEASurement:CFACtor? This command indicates the crest factor of the baseband signal during measurement. Return values: <Cfactor> float Default unit: Example: BB:MEAS:CFAC Queries the measured crest factor of the baseband signal. Usage: Query only [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MEASurement:DURation <Duration>...
  • Page 708 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: BB:MEAS:POW:RMS Queries the rms level of the baseband signal. Usage: Query only [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MEASurement:RTIMe? This command indicates the remaining time until the measurement of the digital I/Q baseband signal is completed. The time is displayed in format "hh:mm:ss".

  • Page 709: Source:bb:power Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <State> 0|1|OFF|ON *RST: Example: BB:MEAS:STAT ON starts measuring the real level values of the digital I/Q baseband signal. [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MFPCorrection? The MIMO Fading Power Correction represents the relative power offset of the selected path compared to the power level of the other path.

  • Page 710: Source:bbin Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: BB:CFAC queries the crest factor of the baseband signal. Usage: Query only [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:POWer:PEAK? This command queries the peak level of the baseband signal relative to full scale of 0.5 V (in terms of dB full scale).
  • Page 711 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem ................694 [:SOURce]:BBIN:OLOad:HOLD:RESet ................694 [:SOURce]:BBIN:OLOad:HOLD:STATe ..................694 [:SOURce]:BBIN:OLOad:STATe ....................695 [:SOURce]:BBIN:PGAin ..................695 [:SOURce]:BBIN:POWer:PEAK ..................695 [:SOURce]:BBIN:POWer:RMS ....................695 [:SOURce]:BBIN:ROUTe ....................696 [:SOURce]:BBIN:SKEW ..................696 [:SOURce]:BBIN:SRATe:ACTual ..............697 [:SOURce<hw>]:BBIN:SRATe:FIFO[:STATus] ................697 [:SOURce<hw>]:BBIN:SRATe:SOURce ....................697 [:SOURce]:BBIN:STATe [:SOURce]:BBIN:ALEVel:EXECute This command starts measuring the input signal. The measurement estimates the crest factor and the peak power.
  • Page 712 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce]:BBIN:FOFFset <Foffset> This command enters the frequency offset for the external baseband signal. The offset affects the signal on the output of the "Baseband" block. The complex I/Q bandwidth of the shifted useful signal must not exceed 80 MHz in total.

  • Page 713: Bbin:sour Anal

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BBIN:MODE <Mode> This command selects the external input signal mode for the "Baseband In" block. Parameters: <Mode> ANALog|DIGital ANALog The external analog baseband signal is supplied via the inputs I and Q.

  • Page 714: [:Source]:Bbin:oload:hold:reset

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: BBIN:OFFS:Q -0.1PCT sets -0.1 %FS DC offset to the Q component of the external input signal. [:SOURce]:BBIN:OLOad:HOLD:RESet This command executes a reset of the Overload Hold State and LED. BBIN:MODE DIG Example: selects the digital baseband input mode.

  • Page 715: [:Source]:Bbin

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce]:BBIN:PGAin <Pgain> This command enters the relative gain for the external baseband signal compared with the signals of the other baseband sources. The actual gain of the different baseband signals depends not only on the path gain setting but also on the signal characteristics such as the crest factor and on the number of used sources.

  • Page 716: [:Source]:Bbin:skew

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Route> A|B|AB The external baseband signal is introduced into path A. The signals are summed if necessary. The external baseband signal is introduced into path B. The signals are summed if necessary.

  • Page 717: [:Source]:Bbin:srate:fifo[:Status]

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:BBIN:SRATe:FIFO[:STATus]? This command indicates the state of the signal transmission. Return values: <Status> OK|OFLow|URUN Resampling is working properly. OFL = Overflow The external sample rate frequency is too high which causes an overflow in signal transmission.

  • Page 718: Source:correction Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: BBIN:SOUR ANAL selects an external analog signal as the input signal. The signal must be applied at the inputs I and Q. BBIN:STAT ON switches on the Baseband In block. The external analog signal is A/D-converted and fed into the digital signal.

  • Page 719: [:Source]:Correction:cset:catalog

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem ........701 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer:MLEVel:STATe ......702 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA[:SENSor<ch>][:POWer]:SONCe ................702 [:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:DELete ..........702 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog ..........703 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension ..........703 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect ........704 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn ........704 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal ............705 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:EXECute ............705 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:MODE ............706 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:SELect ..............706 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET[:SELect] ..............707 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:MLEVel:STATe ................707 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection[:STATe] ................707 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:VALue [:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:CATalog? The command requests a list of user correction tables. The individual lists are separated by commas.

  • Page 720: [:Source]:Correction:cset:data:frequency:points

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: CORR:CSET 'D:/Lists/ucor/ucor1' selects the table ucor1. CORR:CSET:DATA:FREQ 100MHz,102MHz,103MHz,... enters the frequency value in the table UCOR1. [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency:POINts? The command queries the number of frequency values in the selected table. The numerical suffix at SOURce must not be used for this command.

  • Page 721: [:Source]:Correction:cset:data:power:mlevel

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: CORR:CSET 'D:/Lists/ucor/ucor1' selects the table ucor1. CORR:CSET:DATA:POW:POIN? queries the number of level values in the table ucor1. Response: 440 the table ucor1 contains 440 level values. Usage: Query only [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer:MLEVel<ch>? The command queries the measurement results of a multi channel measurement. The values of each column of the user correction list are queried separately, i.e.
  • Page 722 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA[:SENSor<ch>][:POWer]:SONCe The command activates the filling of the user correction list with level values acquired by the power sensor. The command activates the filling of the user correction list with level values acquired by the selected power sensor.
  • Page 723 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Return values: <Catalog> string Example: MMEM:CDIR 'D:/lists/ucor/import' selects the directory for the ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs. CORR:DEXC:AFIL:EXT TXT selects that ASCII files with extension *.txt are listed. CORR:DEXC:AFIL:CAT? queries the available files with extension *.txt.
  • Page 724 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: CORR:DEXC:MODE IMP selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are imported and transferred into user correction lists. CORR:DEXC:AFIL:SEL 'D: /user/ucor/import/ucor.csv' selects that ASCII file ucor.csv is imported. CORR:DEXC:SEL 'D:/user/ucor/import/ucor_imp' selects that the ASCII file ucor.csv is imported into user correction...
  • Page 725 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: CORR:DEXC:MODE EXP selects that the user correction list is exported into an ASCII file. CORR:DEXC:AFIL:SEL 'D: /user/ucor/import/ucor.csv' selects ASCII file ucor.csv as destination for the user correction list data. CORR:DEXC:AFIL:SEP:COL TAB the pairs of frequency and level values are separated by a tabu- lator.
  • Page 726 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: CORR:DEXC:MODE IMP selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are imported and transferred into user correction lists. CORR:DEXC:AFIL:SEL 'D: /user/ucor/import/ucor.csv' selects that ASCII file ucor.csv is imported. CORR:DEXC:SEL 'D:/user/ucor/import/ucor_imp' selects that the ASCII file ucor.csv is imported into user correction...

  • Page 727: Source:fm Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Usage: Event [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:MLEVel:STATe <State> The command activates the use of multi level data for user correction. The setting is only available for user correction list with multi level correction data (see command SOUR:CORR:CSET:DATA:POW:MLEV:STAT ON).
  • Page 728 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem For information about the requred options, see chapter 5.5.11.4, "Frequency Modulation (FM)", on page 238..................708 [:SOURce<hw>]:FM[:DEViation] ................708 [:SOURce<hw>]:FM:EXTernal:COUPling .....................708 [:SOURce<hw>]:FM:MODE ..................709 [:SOURce<hw>]:FM:SENSitivity ..................709 [:SOURce<hw>]:FM:SOURce ....................710 [:SOURce<hw>]:FM:STATe [:SOURce<hw>]:FM[:DEViation] <Deviation> The command sets the modulation deviation of the frequency modulation in Hz. The maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency set and the selected modulation mode (see data sheet).
  • Page 729 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Mode> NORMal | LNOise NORMal The maximum range for modulation bandwidth and FM deviation is available. LNOise (requires option R&S SMU-B22) Frequency modulation with phase noise and spurious characteristics close to CW mode. The range for modulation bandwidth and FM deviation is reduced (see data sheet).

  • Page 730: Source:frequency Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Source> INT|EXT|INT,EXT *RST: INTernal Example: FM:SOUR INT selects the internal modulation source. Usage: SCPI conform [:SOURce<hw>]:FM:STATe <State> The command activates/deactivates frequency modulation. Activation of frequency modulation deactivates phase modulation. Activation of FM (FM:STAT ON) deactivates phase modulation.
  • Page 731 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:CENTer <Center> The command sets the center frequency of the sweep. This setting in combination with the span setting ([SOURce:]FREQuency:SPAN) defines the sweep range. This command is linked to the commands [SOURce:]FREQuency:STARt and [SOURce:]FREQuency:STOP, i.e.
  • Page 732 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Mode> INTernal|EXTernal | COUPlec|ECOuplec INTernal The signal of the internal local oscilltor is used. This mode corresponds to a normal operation. EXTernal An external signal is used for path A. In case of a two-path instrument, the internal local oscillator signal is used for path B.
  • Page 733 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency[:CW|:FIXed] <Fixed> The command sets the frequency of the RF output signal for CW mode (SOURce:FREQuency:MODE CW). In Sweep mode (SOURce:FREQuency:MODE SWEep), this value is linked to the current sweep frequency. In addition to a numerical value, it is also possible to specify UP and DOWN. The frequency is then increased or decreased by the value which is set under [SOURce<[1]|2>:]FREQuency:STEP.
  • Page 734 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Usage: SCPI conform [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MANual <Manual> In Sweep mode (:SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE) the command sets the frequency for the next sweep step in the Step sweep mode (SOUR:SWE:MODE MAN). Here only frequency val- ues between the settings [SOUR]:FREQ:STAR and ...:STOP are permitted. Each sweep step is triggered by a separate SOUR:FREQ:MAN command.
  • Page 735 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Mode> CW|FIXed|SWEep|LIST CW|FIXed The instrument operates in fixed-frequency mode; CW and FIXed are synonyms. The output frequency is set with :SOURce:FREQuency:CW|FIXed. In case of two-path instruments, for the selected path. SWEep The instrument operates in SWEep mode.
  • Page 736 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:PHASe:CONTinuous:HIGH? Queries the maximum frequency of the frequency range for phase continuous settings. The maximum frequency of the frequency range depends on the mode selected with the command SOURce:FREQuency:PHASe:CONTinuous:MODE. Return values: <High>...
  • Page 737 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Mode> NARRow|WIDE NARRow The available frequency range is smaller than with setting wide. It is asymmetrical around the RF frequency set at the point of activating the phase continuous settings. WIDE The wide mode provides a larger frequency range.
  • Page 738 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Span> float Range: 0 to RFmax Increment: 0.01Hz *RST: 400MHz Example: FREQ:CENT 400 MHz sets the center frequency of the frequency sweep to 400 MHz. FREQ:SPAN 200 MHz sets a span of 200 MHz. This sets the sweep range to 300 MHz to 500 MHz.
  • Page 739 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STOP <Stop> This command sets the stop frequency for the sweep mode. STOP can be less than STARt. This command is linked to the commands [:SOUR]:FREQ:CENt and [:SOUR]:FREQ:SPAN, i.e. changing these values causes the STARt value to change, and vice versa: STOP = (CENTer + SPAN/2).

  • Page 740: Source:input Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STEP:MODE <Mode> This command activates (USER) or deactivates (DECimal) the user-defined step width used when varying the frequency value with the frequency values UP/DOWN. The com- mand is linked to the command Variation Active for manual control, i.e. the command also activates/deactivates the user-defined step width used when varying the frequency value with the rotary knob.
  • Page 741 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Impedance> G1K|G50 *RST: Example: INP:DATA:IMP G50 all data inputs are set to 50 ohm to ground. [:SOURce]:INPut:DATA:THReshold <Threshold> The command sets the high/low threshold of the data inputs in the baseband section. In the case of positive polarity, this threshold determines the point as of which a signal is high (active) or low (inactive).
  • Page 742 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Slope> NEGative|POSitive *RST: POSitive Example: INP:TRIG:BBAN:SLOP NEG the active slope of the external trigger signal at the TRIGGER connectors is the falling slope. [:SOURce]:INPut:TRIGger:IMPedance <Impedance> The command sets the impedance of the trigger and control signal inputs and affects: ●...

  • Page 743: Source:iq Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce]:INPut:TRIGger:SLOPe <Slope> Sets the polarity of the active slope of an applied instrument trigger. This setting affects the INST TRIG input (BNC connector at the rear of the instrument). For two-path instruments, the external trigger for path B is applied at the INST TRIG pin at the AUX I/O interface.
  • Page 744 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:GAIN <Gain> This command specifies the baseband gain for the external analog wideband I/Q signal. Thus, the modulation of the I/Q modulator can be optimized for any measurement requirement. The gain settings for an internal or external baseband signal are performed with command SOUR:BB:IQGain.
  • Page 745 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <I> float Range: -10 to 10 Increment: 0.02PCT *RST: Default unit: Example: IQ:IMP:LEAK:I 3 PCT sets the leakage for the I-channel to 3 percent. [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:IMPairment:LEAKage:Q <Q> This command sets the carrier leakage amplitude for the Q-channel of the I/Q modulation.

  • Page 746: Selects An External Analog Signal As The Input Signal. The Signal Must Be Applied At The Inputs I And Q

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: IQ:IMP OFF deactivates I/Q impairment. [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:SOURce <Source> This command selects the input signal for the I/Q modulator. In case of two-path instruments, this selection is only available for Path A (SOURce[1]).
  • Page 747 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:WBSTate <Wbstate> This command selects optimized setting for wideband modulation signals (>5 MHz) (State ON). Parameters: <Wbstate> 0|1|OFF|ON *RST: Example: IQ:WBST ON activates optimized setting for wideband signals. [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IQGain <Iqgain> This command specifies the baseband gain for the internal baseband signal.

  • Page 748: Source:iq:output Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem 7.15.10 SOURce:IQ:OUTput Subsystem 7.15.10.1 Analog I/Q Outputs This subsystem contains the commands for configuring the differential output. For information about the required options, see chapter 5.7.3.2, "Analog I/Q Output", on page 309.
  • Page 749 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: IQ:OUTP:BIAS:COUP ON activates coupling of bias settings of the two components. [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:BIAS:I <I> This command sets the amplifier bias. The maximum overall voltage depends on the I/Q output type. ● Single ended: IQ:OUTP:POW:PEP + SOUR:IQ:OUTP:BIAS:I|Q <= 3.7 volts.
  • Page 750 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:BIAS:OPTimization[:RF]:STATe <State> This command activates/deactivates optimization of level accuracy and imbalance for RF Output. Level accuracy and imbalance can be either optimized for RF output (active) or for differential outputs (not active).
  • Page 751 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut[:ANALog]:POWer:PEP:RESult? Displays the resulting output off-load voltage of both signal components at the rear panel. For two-path instruments, the outputs are assigned with command SOURce:BB:IQOut:SOURce. Return values: <Result> float Increment: 0.001 V...
  • Page 752 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:OFFSet:I <I> The command is only valid for output type Differential (IQ:OUTP:TYPE DIFF). This command sets an offset between the inverting and non-inverting output. The maximum overall voltage (0.5 * IQ:OUTP:POW:PEP + SOUR:IQ:OUTP:BIAS:I|Q + 0.5 * SOUR:IQ: OUTP:OFFS:I|Q) is 3.7 volts.

  • Page 753: Digital I/Q Outputs

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:TYPE <Type> This command selects the output type. For two-path instruments, the outputs are assigned with command on page 728. [:SOURce]:BB:IQOutput:SOURce Parameters: <Type> SINGle|DIFFerential SINGle The I/Q-signal components are output single-ended. DIFFerential The I/Q-signal components are output differential.
  • Page 754 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: IQ:OUTP:DIG:CDEV? queries the connected device ID. Usage: Query only [:SOURce]:IQ:OUTPut:DIGital:OFLow:HOLD:RESet This command executes a reset of the overflow hold state and LED. SOUR:IQ:OUTP:DIG:OFL:HOLD:RESet Example: resets the overflow hold state. Usage: Event [:SOURce]:IQ:OUTPut:DIGital:OFLow:HOLD:STATe? This command queries an overflow since the last reset.
  • Page 755 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Pon> OFF|UNCHanged *RST: Example: IQ:OUTP:DIG:PON OFF deactivates the output when the instrument is switched on. IQ:OUTP:DIG:PON UNCH sets the output to the status that was active before the last switch off.
  • Page 756 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:DIGital:POWer:STEP[:INCRement] <Increment> The command sets the step width for the frequency setting if the frequency values UP/DOWN are used and variation mode SOUR:IQ:OUTP:DIG:POW:STEP:MODE USER is selected. The command is linked to "Variation Step" for manual operation, i.e. the command also sets the step width of the rotary knob for "Variation Active ON".
  • Page 757 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Via> PEP|LEVel The signal level is expressed in terms of a peak envelope power value (PEP). The level entry fields and the corresponding units are displayed in the status bar. LEVel The signal level is expressed in terms of a rms value.
  • Page 758 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: SOUR:BBIN:SRAT:FIFO:STATus? queries the FIFO Status of the sample rate. Usage: Query only [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:DIGital:SRATe:SOURce <Source> This command selects the source for setting the sample rate of the digital I/Q output signal. Note: With a connected R&S EX-IQ-Box either the internal clock source (User defined) or an external clock (Digital I/Q In) can be selected in the settings dialog of the R&S EX-...

  • Page 759: Source:lfoutput Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem 7.15.11 SOURce:LFOutput Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for setting the LF signal source in CW and Sweep mode as well as for analog modulation. An LF generator is always available in the instrument.
  • Page 760 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce]:LFOutput:FREQuency <Frequency> The command sets the frequency of the LF signal for CW mode (:SOUR:MODE CW mode). The setting is valid for all analog modulations (AM/FM/PhiM/Pulse) with internal modu- lation source. In Sweep mode (SOUR:LFO:FREQ:MODE SWE), the frequency is linked to the sweep frequency.
  • Page 761 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Mode> CW|FIXed|SWEep CW|FIXed The instrument operates in fixed-frequency mode. CW and FIXed are synonyms. The output frequency is set with [SOURce:]LFOutput:FREQuency. SWEep The instrument operates in SWEep mode. The frequency is set using the commands SOURce:LFOutput:FREQuency:STARt;...
  • Page 762 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce]:LFOutput:FREQuency:STOP <Stop> This command sets the stop frequency for the LF sweep. Parameters: <Stop> float Range: 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz Increment: 0.1 Hz *RST: 50 kHz Default unit: Example: LFO:FREQ:STOP 200 kHz sets the stop frequency for the LF sweep to 200 kHz.
  • Page 763 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: LFO:SWE:MODE STEP sets the step-by-step processing of the LF sweep. LFO:SWE:EXEC starts a step of the LF sweep. Usage: Event [:SOURce]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE <Mode> The command sets the cycle mode of the LF sweep.
  • Page 764 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:POINts <Points> The command sets the number of steps in an LF sweep. The command is linked to the command :LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP as follows. The following applies for linear sweeps and STARt < STOP: POINts = ((STOP-STARt) / STEP:LIN) + 1 The following applies for logarithmic sweeps and STARt <...
  • Page 765 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing <Spacing> The command selects linear or logarithmic sweep spacing. Parameters: <Spacing> LINear|LOGarithmic *RST: LINear| Example: LFO:SWE:SPAC LIN selects linear sweep spacing. [:SOURce]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear] <Linear> The command sets the step width for the linear sweep.
  • Page 766 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic <Logarithmic> The command specifies the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps. The next frequency value of a sweep is calculated (for STARt < STOP) using the following formula: New frequency = Old frequency + STEP:LOG x Old frequency STEP:LOG therefore gives the fraction of the old frequency.

  • Page 767: Source:list Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem 7.15.12 SOURce:LIST Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for the List mode of the instrument. The same lists are, accessed for both paths. File operations such as creating, deleting and querying lists are therefore path-independent. In this case, the suffix under SOURce must be omitted.
  • Page 768 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem SCPI refers to the individual lists as segments..................748 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:CATalog ..................749 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DELete ...................749 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DELete:ALL ............750 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog ............750 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension .............751 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect ...........751 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn ...........752 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal ..............752 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:EXECute ................752 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:MODE ...............753 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:SELect ..................753 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl ...................754...
  • Page 769 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DELete <Delete> The command deletes the specified list. The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.lsw in a directory of the user's choice. The directory applicable to the command is defined with the command MMEMory:CDIR.
  • Page 770 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog? The command requests a list of available ASCII files for export/import of list mode data. The individual files are separated by commas. The ASCII files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.txt or *.csv in a directory of the user's choice.
  • Page 771 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect <Select> The command selects the ASCII file to be imported or exported. The ASCII files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.txt or *.csv in a directory of the user's choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command MMEMory:CDIR.
  • Page 772 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal <Decimal> The command the decimal separator used in the ASCII data between '.' (decimal point) and ',' (comma) with floating-point numerals. Parameters: <Decimal> DOT|COMMa *RST: Example: LIST:DEXC:MODE EXP selects that the list mode list is exported into an ASCII file.
  • Page 773 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Mode> IMPort|EXPort *RST: IMPort Example: LIST:DEXC:MODE IMP selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are imported and transferred into list mode lists. LIST:DEXC:AFIL:SEL 'D: /user/listmode/import/list.csv' selects that ASCII file list.csv is imported.
  • Page 774 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Usage: SCPI conform [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREQuency <Frequency> The command fills the FREQuency part of the selected list with data. The data can be given either as a list of numbers (list can be of any length and list entries must be sepa- rated by commas) or as binary block data.
  • Page 775 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: LIST:SEL 'D:/Lists/Listmode/list3' selects list3 for use in List mode. FREQ:MODE LIST activates List mode. List 3 is processed. LIST:MODE STEP selects manual, step-by-step processing of the list. LIST:IND 5 the frequency/level value pair with index 5 is executed.
  • Page 776 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: LIST:SEL 'D:/Lists/Listmode/list3' selects list3 for use in List mode. LIST:IND:STAR 25 sets 25 as start index of the index range. LIST:IND:STOP 49 sets 49 as stop index of the index range.
  • Page 777 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:POWer <Power> The command fills the Level part of the selected list with data. The data can be given either as a list of numbers (list can be of any length and list entries must be separated by commas) or as binary block data.
  • Page 778 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: LIST:SEL 'D:/Lists/Listmode/list3' selects list3 for editing. List3 is created if it does not yet exist. LIST:POW:POIN? queries the number of levels in list3. Response: 327 LIST2 has 327 level entries. Usage:...

  • Page 779: Source:modulation Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:TRIGger:SOURce <Source> The command sets the trigger source for the LIST mode. The names of the parameters correspond to those under sweep mode. SCPI uses other names for the parameters; these names are also accepted by the instrument. The SCPI names should be used if compatibility is an important consideration.

  • Page 780: Source:path Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: MOD:STAT OFF switches off all modulations. 7.15.14 SOURce:PATH Subsystem This subsystem contains the command for retrieving the number of installed RF paths. [:SOURce]:PATH:COUNt? The command queries the number of installed RF paths.

  • Page 781: Source:pm Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:PHASe:REFerence The command adopts the phase set with SOURce:PHASe:ADJust as the current phase. Example: PHAS 0.1RAD changes the phase by 0.1 RAD relative to the current phase. PHAS:REF adopts the set phase as the current phase.
  • Page 782 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:PM:EXTernal:COUPling <Coupling> The command selects the coupling mode for the external modulation input (EXT MOD) in the case of phase modulation. Note: Coupling for external feed via input EXT MOD can be set independently for mod- ulations AM, PM and PhiM.
  • Page 783 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:PM:SENSitivity? The command queries the input sensitivity of the EXT MOD input in RAD/V. The com- mand is only effective if the external modulation source is selected (SOUR:PM:SOUR EXT). The returned value depends on the modulation deviation setting (SOUR:PM:DEViation).

  • Page 784: Source:power Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem 7.15.17 SOURce:POWer Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for setting the output level, level control and level correction of the RF signal. Other units can also be used instead of dBm: ●...
  • Page 785 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC[:STATe] <State> The command activates/deactivates automatic level control. Parameters: <State> ON|OFF|AUTO Internal level control is permanently activated. Internal level control is deactivated; Sample & Hold mode is activated. AUTO Internal level control is activated/deactivated automatically depending on the operating state.
  • Page 786 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: SOUR:POW:LEV:IMM:AMPL 15 or :POW 15 sets the RF level at output A to 15 dBm. Usage: SCPI conform [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet <Offset> Note: The level offset is also effective for level sweeps! The command specifies the constant level offset of a downstream attenuator/amplifier. If a level offset is entered, the level entered with :POWer no longer corresponds to the RF output level.
  • Page 787 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Rcl> INCLude | EXCLude INCLude The stored level is also loaded when a stored instrument configuration is loaded. EXCLude The RF level is not loaded when a stored instrument configuration is loaded. The current level is retained.
  • Page 788 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:MANual <Manual> In Sweep mode (:SOUR:POW:MODE SWE) the command sets the level for the next sweep step in the Step sweep mode (:SOUR:SWE:POW:MODE MAN). Here only level values between the settings [:SOUR]:POW:STAR and ...:STOP are permitted. Each sweep step is triggered by a separate :SOUR:POW:MAN command.
  • Page 789 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Mode> CW|FIXed|SWEep CW|FIXed The instrument operates at a constant level. CW and FIXed are synonyms. The output level is set with :SOURce:POWer. SWEep The instrument operates in SWEep mode. The level is set using the commands SOURce:POWer:STARt;...
  • Page 790 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STARt <Start> The command sets the RF start level in Sweep mode. As with the "Level" value entered in the "RF Level" menu, the OFFSet value is also taken into consideration with this command.
  • Page 791 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP:MODE <Mode> This command activates (USER) or deactivates (DECimal) the user-defined step width used when varying the level value with the level values UP/DOWN. The command is linked to setting "Variation Active" for manual control, i.e. the command also activates/deacti- vates the user-defined step width used when varying the level value with the rotary knob.

  • Page 792: Source:pulm Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem 7.15.18 SOURce:PULM Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for setting the pulse modulation. The LF gen- erator is used as the internal modulation source. The pulse frequency of the internal rectangular signal is therefore set in the SOURce:LFOutput subsystem.

  • Page 793: Source:roscillator Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Usage: SCPI conform [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:STATe <State> The command activates/deactivates the pulse modulation. Parameters: <State> 0|1|OFF|ON *RST: Example: PULM:STAT ON activates pulse modulation with the modulation source selected under SOURce:PULM:SOURce. Usage: SCPI conform 7.15.19 SOURce:ROSCillator Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for setting the external and internal reference frequency.
  • Page 794 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:RFOFf:STATe <State> The command determines if the RF output is switched off in case of a missing external reference signal for selection external source. If enabled, this setting ensures that no improper RF signal due to the missing external reference signal is output and used for measurements.

  • Page 795: Source:sweep Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust[:STATe] <State> The command determines whether the calibrated (OFF) or a user-defined (ON) adjust- ment value is used for fine adjustment of the frequency. With STATe ON, the instrument is no longer in the calibrated state. However, the calibration value is not changed and the instrument resumes the calibrated state after switching the Adjustment State to Off.
  • Page 796 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem This example shows how to set up a frequiency sweep. 1. Set the sweep range. [SOURce:]FREQuency:CENTer 200 MHz [SOURce:]FREQuency:SPAN 300 MHz 2. Select linear or logarithmic spacing. [SOURce:]SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing LIN 3. Set the step width and dwell time.
  • Page 797 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Dwell> float Range: 3ms to 10s Increment: 0.1m *RST: Default unit: Example: SWE:DWEL 12 ms sets a dwell time of 12 ms for a frequency sweep at the RF output. [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:EXECute The command triggers a sweep.
  • Page 798 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:POINts <Points> The command sets the number of steps in an RF sweep. The command is linked to the command :SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP as follows: The following applies for linear sweeps: POINts = (SPAN / STEP:LIN) + 1 The following applies for logarithmic sweeps and STARt <...
  • Page 799 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: SOUR:SWE:SHAP TRI selects the sweep cycle with alternating ascending and descend- ing sweep directions. [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing <Spacing> The command selects linear or logarithmic sweep spacing. The keyword [:FREQuency] can be omitted (see example). The command is then SCPI- compliant.
  • Page 800 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Example: FREQ:STAR sets the start frequency to 100 MHz. Example: FREQ:STOP sets the stop frequency to 500 MHz. Example: SWE:SPAC LIN sets linear sweep spacing. Example: SWE:STEP 2 MHz sets the step width for linear sweep spacing to 2 MHz (RF sweep at the RF output.
  • Page 801 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Amode> NORMal|HPOWer NORMal The level settings are made in the range of the electronically switching attenuator. The high level ranges are not available. HPOWer The level settings are made in the range of the option. Only the high level range is available.
  • Page 802 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Mode> AUTO|MANual|STEP AUTO Each trigger triggers exactly one complete sweep. MANual The trigger system is not active. Each level step of the sweep is triggered individually, either by varying the Current Level value using the rotary knob under manual control or by means of a POW:MAN command under remote control.
  • Page 803 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SOURce Subsystem Parameters: <Shape> SAWTooth|TRIangle SAWTooth One sweep runs from the start level to the stop level. The subsequent sweep starts at the start level again, i.e. the shape of sweep sequence resembles a sawtooth.

  • Page 804: Status Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A STATus Subsystem Parameters: <Logarithmic> float Range: 0.01 to 165 dB Increment: 0.01dB *RST: Default unit: Example: SWE:POW:STEP 10dB sets the step width for logarithmic sweep spacing to 10 dB of the previous level in each instance (for a level sweep at RF output).
  • Page 805 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A STATus Subsystem STATus:OPERation:CONDition? <Condition > The command queries the content of the CONDition part of the STATus:OPERation reg- ister. This part contains information on the action currently being performed in the instru- ment. The content is not deleted after being read out since it indicates the current hard- ware status.
  • Page 806 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A STATus Subsystem Parameters: <Ptransition> string Example: STAT:OPER:PTR 32767 all transitions from 0 to 1 in the condition part of the Status:Oper- ation register cause an entry to be made in the EVENt part. Usage: SCPI conform STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <Ntransition>...
  • Page 807 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A STATus Subsystem Example: STAT:OPER:COND queries the Status:Questionable:Condition register. Usage: Query only SCPI conform STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <Enable> The command sets the bits of the ENABle part of the STATus:QUEStionable register. This setting determines which events of the Status-Event part are enabled for the sum bit in the status byte.

  • Page 808: System Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SYSTem Subsystem STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]? <EVENt> The command queries the content of the EVENt part of the STATus:QUEStionable register. This part contains information on the actions performed in the instrument since the last readout. The content of the EVENt part is deleted after being read out.
  • Page 809 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SYSTem Subsystem ....................793 SYSTem:ERRor:COUNt ....................793 SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT] ......................793 :SYSTem:KLOCk ..................794 :SYSTem:PROTect<ch>[:STATe] ......................794 SYSTem:SERRor ..................795 :SYSTem:STARtup:COMPlete ......................795 :SYSTem:TIME ......................795 SYSTem:VERSion :SYSTem:BEEPer:STATe <State> This command switches the key beep on or off. Parameters: <State> 0|1|OFF|ON *RST: Example:...
  • Page 810 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SYSTem Subsystem Parameters: <Address> float Range: 1 to 30 *RST: Example: SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 14 sets GPIB address. Usage: SCPI conform :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:COMMon]:DOMain <Domain> The command enters the domain of the network. Parameters: <Domain> string SYST:COMM:NETW:COMM:DOM ABC.DE Example: enters the domain of the network.
  • Page 811 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SYSTem Subsystem Return values: <Resource> string Example: SYST:COMM:GPIB:RES queries the VISA resource string. Response: GPIB::28::INSTR Usage: Query only :SYSTem:DATE <Date> The command sets the date for the instrument-internal calendar. Parameters: <Date> <year>,<month>,<day> Example: SYST:DATE 2003,05,01 sets May 1, 2003.
  • Page 812 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SYSTem Subsystem Usage: Query only SCPI conform SYSTem:ERRor:CODE:ALL? The command queries all entries in the error queue and then deletes them. Only the error numbers are returned and not the entire error text. Return values: <All>...
  • Page 813 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SYSTem Subsystem SYSTem:ERRor:COUNt? The command queries the number of entries in the error queue. If the error queue is empty, '0' is returned. Return values: <Count> string Example: SYST:ERR:COUN queries the number of entries in the error queue.
  • Page 814 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A SYSTem Subsystem Example: SYST:KLOC ON activates the keyboard lock. The keyboard cannot be operated again until it has been enabled with SYST:KLOC OFF. Usage: SCPI conform :SYSTem:PROTect<ch>[:STATe] <State>,<password> The command activates and deactivates the specified protection level.

  • Page 815: Test Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A TEST Subsystem :SYSTem:STARtup:COMPlete? The command queries if the startup of the instrument is completed. Return values: <Complete> 0|1|OFF|ON SYST:STAR:COMP Example: Response: 1 The startup of the instrument is completed. Usage: Query only :SYSTem:TIME <Time>...
  • Page 816 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A TEST Subsystem Improper use could destroy the assembly! The respective hardware assembly responds directly to the :TEST:DIRect command; any safety mechanisms are bypassed. The command is used for servicing purposes and should not be applied by the user.
  • Page 817 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A TEST Subsystem Example: TEST:BBIN:RBERror? Response: "0" on success, "1" on fail Usage: Query only :TEST<hw>:BBOut:LRATe <Lrate> The command sets the interface speed. The "External LVDS Test" is used to check the correct data transmission of the digital baseband outputs (BBOUT).

  • Page 818: Trigger Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A TRIGger Subsystem :TEST<hw>:DIRect <HW_assembly>,<subadress>,<hex data string> :TEST<hw>:DIRect? <HW_assembly>,<subadress> The respective hardware assembly responds directly to the command; any safety mech- anisms are bypassed. This function is only available via remote control. Parameters for setting and query: <HW_assembly>...
  • Page 819 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A TRIGger Subsystem Table 7-3: Cross-reference between the manual and remote control R&S name SCPI name Command under manual control AUTO IMMediate "Auto" mode SINGle "Single" mode. EXTernal EXTernal "Ext Single" and "Ext Step" mode.
  • Page 820 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A TRIGger Subsystem :TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep[:IMMediate] The command immediately starts an RF frequency sweep. The sweep to be executed depends on the respective MODE setting (SOURce:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE SING). The command corresponds to the manual-control "Execute Trigger". SWE:FREQ:MODE SING Example: sets the Single trigger mode, i.e.
  • Page 821 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A TRIGger Subsystem Example: SWE:POW:MODE STEP sets the STEP trigger mode, i.e. a trigger starts the sweep initially, and then the sweep is generated continuously. TRIG:PSW starts the continuous generation of the RF level sweep at output...

  • Page 822: Unit Subsystem

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A UNIT Subsystem Example: TRIG starts all active sweeps. Usage: Event :TRIGger<hw>[:SWEep]:SOURce <Source> The command sets the trigger source for all sweeps. The names of the parameters correspond directly to the various settings under manual control.

  • Page 823: Alphabetical List Of R&S Smiq Commands

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Alphabetical List of R&S SMIQ Commands Parameters: <Angle> DEG|RAD *RST: Example: UNIT:ANGL DEG sets default unit DEG for all commands which determine angle values. Usage: SCPI conform :UNIT:POWer <Power> The command defines the default unit for power. It is valid for all commands which deter- mine power values.
  • Page 824 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Alphabetical List of R&S SMIQ Commands R&S SMIQ Command Short description R&S Remarks BERT:SETup:DENable Configuration of the Data Enable input BERT:SETup:IGNore Ignoring of complete 0 or 1 frames BERT:SETup:MCOunt Number of data bits BERT:SETup:MERRor...
  • Page 825 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Alphabetical List of R&S SMIQ Commands R&S SMIQ Command Short description R&S Remarks ARB:IQ:... IQ settings ARB:SEQuence Trigger mode ARB:STATe ARB generator on/off ARB:TRIGger:DELay Trigger delay ARB:TRIGger:INHibit Trigger inhibition ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut<[1]|2>: Marker delay DELay ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut<[1]|2>:...
  • Page 826 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Alphabetical List of R&S SMIQ Commands R&S SMIQ Command Short description R&S Remarks FORMat[:DATA] Data format MEMory:... Memory configuration New functions OUTPut OUTPut[1]:... RF output settings ● OUTPut1= path A ● OUTPut2 = path B...
  • Page 827 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Alphabetical List of R&S SMIQ Commands R&S SMIQ Command Short description R&S Remarks [SOURce[1]:]CORRection: Frequency data CSET:DATA:FREQuency [SOURce[1]:]CORRection: Level data CSET:DATA:POWer [SOURce[1]:]CORRection: Deletes the specified table CSET:DELete [SOURce[1]:]CORRection: Table for user correction CSET[:SELect] [SOURce[1]:]CORRection[:...
  • Page 828 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Alphabetical List of R&S SMIQ Commands R&S SMIQ Command Short description R&S Remarks [SOURce[1]:]DM:DLISt: Delete Data list DELete [SOURce[1]:]DM:DLISt:FREE? Free space for data [SOURce[1]:]DM:DLISt: Query length of data list POINTs? [SOURce[1]:]DM:DLISt: Select data list...
  • Page 829 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Alphabetical List of R&S SMIQ Commands R&S SMIQ Command Short description R&S Remarks [SOURce[1]:]DM:STATe Digital modulation on/off [SOURce[1]:]DM:THReshold[: High/low threshold of digital ALL] inputs [SOURce[1]:]DM:TRIGger: Trigger delay DELay [SOURce[1]:]DM:TRIGger: Trigger inhibition INHibit [SOURce[1]:]DM:TRIGger: Trigger slope...
  • Page 830 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Alphabetical List of R&S SMIQ Commands R&S SMIQ Command Short description R&S Remarks [SOURce[1]:]FM:STATe State [SOURce[1]:]FREQuency:..SOURce<[1]|2> [SOURce[1]:]FREQuency: RF-sweep center frequency CENTer [SOURce[1]:]FREQuency[: RF frequency CW|FIXed] [SOURce[1]:]FREQuency[: Recall RF frequency CW|:FIXed]:RCL [SOURce[1]:]FREQuency: Frequency for the next sweep...
  • Page 831 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Alphabetical List of R&S SMIQ Commands R&S SMIQ Command Short description R&S Remarks [SOURce[1]:]FSIMulator: Crest factor for two channel CFACtor:EXTern fading [SOURce[1]:]FSIMulator: Number of paths CONFigure [SOURce[1]:]FSIMulator: Coupling of correlation coeffi- COUPle:CORRelation: cient COEFficient...
  • Page 832 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Alphabetical List of R&S SMIQ Commands R&S SMIQ Command Short description R&S Remarks [SOURce[1]:]FSIMulator: Delay range MDELay:MOVing:DELay: VARiation [SOURce[1]:]FSIMulator: Insertion loss of moving path MDELay:MOVing:LOSS [SOURce[1]:]FSIMulator: Speed of the delay variation MDELay:MOVing:VPERiod [SOURce[1]:]FSIMulator: Moving Delay State...
  • Page 833 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Alphabetical List of R&S SMIQ Commands R&S SMIQ Command Short description R&S Remarks [SOURce[1]:]FSIMulator: Reset of Pseudo Noise Gener- SEQuence:RESet ator [SOURce[1]:]FSIMulator: Speed unit SPEed:UNIT [SOURce[1]:]FSIMulator: Standard settings STANdard [SOURce[1]:]FSIMulator[: Fading Simulator on/off STATe]...
  • Page 834 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Alphabetical List of R&S SMIQ Commands R&S SMIQ Command Short description R&S Remarks [SOURce[1]:]GSM:FLISt:... SOURceFilter lists [SOURce[1]:]GSM:FORMat SOURceModulation type [SOURce[1]:]GSM:FSK: SOURceFSK modulation devi- DEViation ation [SOURce[1]:]GSM:PRAMp: SOURceRamp envelope offset X DELay [SOURce[1]:]GSM:PRAMp: SOURceOffset in the falling...
  • Page 835 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Alphabetical List of R&S SMIQ Commands R&S SMIQ Command Short description R&S Remarks [SOURce[1]:]GSM:TRIGger: Trigger delay DELay [SOURce[1]:]GSM:TRIGger: Trigger inhibit INHibit [SOURce[1]:]GSM:TRIGger: Trigger signal OUTPut<[1]|2> [SOURce[1]:]GSM:TRIGger: Marker delay OUTPut<[1]|2>:DELay [SOURce[1]:]GSM:TRIGger: Frame marker period OUTPut<[1]|2>:PERiod...
  • Page 836 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Alphabetical List of R&S SMIQ Commands R&S SMIQ Command Short description R&S Remarks [SOURce[1]:]PHASe..Phase settings SOURce<[1]|2>: PHASe:..[SOURce[1]:]PHASe: Sets the phase REFerence [SOURce[1]:]PHASe[:ADJust] Phase variation relative to the current phase [SOURce[1]:]PM:..[SOURce[1]:]PM[:DEViation] PM deviation [SOURce[1]:]PM: Coupling of external mod.
  • Page 837 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Alphabetical List of R&S SMIQ Commands R&S SMIQ Command Short description R&S Remarks [SOURce[1]:]PULM:POLarity Polarity pulse modulation [SOURce[1]:]PULM:STATe Pulse modulation on/off [SOURce[1]:]ROSCillator: Reference frequency [SOURce[1]:]ROSCillator: Frequency of the external ref- EXTernal:FREQuency erence [SOURce[1]:]ROSCillator[: Adjustment value...
  • Page 838 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Alphabetical List of R&S SMIQ Commands R&S SMIQ Command Short description R&S Remarks :SOURce2:SWEep[: Sweep mode LF sweep FREQuency]:MODE :SOURce2:SWEep[: Number of steps in an LF FREQuency]:POINts sweep :SOURce2:SWEep[: Lin or log LF sweep...
  • Page 839 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Alphabetical List of R&S SMIQ Commands R&S SMIQ Command Short description R&S Remarks [:SOURce]:W3GPp: TPC pattern BSTation<n>:CHANnel<n>: TPC:PATTern [:SOURce]:W3GPp: Queries code domain conflicts BSTation<n>:DOMain:ERRor? [:SOURce]:W3GPp: Multichannel setting on/off BSTation<n>:MCHannel: EXECute? [:SOURce]:W3GPp:BSTation: Number of Page Indicators...
  • Page 840 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Alphabetical List of R&S SMIQ Commands R&S SMIQ Command Short description R&S Remarks [:SOURce]W3GPp:COPY: Destination for copy process DESTination [:SOURce]:W3GPp:COPY: Starting the copy process EXECute [:SOURce]:W3GPp:COPY: Source for copy process SOURce [:SOURce]:W3GPp:CRATe: Output chip rate...
  • Page 841 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Alphabetical List of R&S SMIQ Commands R&S SMIQ Command Short description R&S Remarks [:SOURce]:W3GPp: Value of TFCI field MSTation<n>:DPCCh:TFCI [:SOURce]:W3GPp: TFCI on/off MSTation<n>:DPCCh:TFCI: STATe [:SOURce]:W3GPp: Queries Timing Offset MSTation<n>:DPCCh:TOFFset? [:SOURce]:W3GPp: TPC Misuse MSTation<n>:DPCCh:TPC: MISuse...
  • Page 842 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Alphabetical List of R&S SMIQ Commands R&S SMIQ Command Short description R&S Remarks [:SOURce]:W3GPp: Length of the message compo- MSTation<n>:PCPCh:MLENgth nent [:SOURce]:W3GPp: Pattern DATA part MSTation<n>:PCPCh:PATTern [:SOURce]:W3GPp: Length of the power control MSTation<n>:PCPCh:PLENgth preamble...
  • Page 843 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Alphabetical List of R&S SMIQ Commands R&S SMIQ Command Short description R&S Remarks [:SOURce]:W3GPp: TFCI value PRACH MSTation<n>:PRACh:TFCI [:SOURce]:W3GPp: Scrambling Code MSTation<n>:SCODe [:SOURce]:W3GPp: Scrambling Code Type MSTation<n>:SCODe:MODE [:SOURce]:W3GPp: User equipment on/off MSTation<n>:STATe [:SOURce]:W3GPp: Data source TPC field PCPCH X MSTation<n>:TPC:DATA...
  • Page 844 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Alphabetical List of R&S SMIQ Commands R&S SMIQ Command Short description R&S Remarks [:SOURce]:W3GPp:TRIGger: Trigger delay DELay [:SOURce]:W3GPp:TRIGger: Trigger inhibition INHibit [:SOURce]:W3GPp:TRIGger: Marker signal OUTPut<[1]|2> [:SOURce]:W3GPp:TRIGger: Marker delay OUTPut<[1]|2>:DELay [:SOURce]:W3GPp:TRIGger: Polarity of marker OUTPut<[1]|2>:POLarity...
  • Page 845 ® Remote Control Commands R&S SMU200A Alphabetical List of R&S SMIQ Commands R&S SMIQ Command Short description R&S Remarks TRIGger:... Trigger TRIGger[1]:BERT[: Trigger for BER IMMediate] TRIGger[1]:BLER[: Trigger for BLER IMMediate] TRIGger[1]:DM[:IMMediate] Trigger mode for DM and digi- tal standards...

  • Page 847: Maintenance

    ® Maintenance R&S SMU200A Storing and Packing 8 Maintenance The instrument does not need a periodic maintenance. Only the cleaning of the instru- ment is essential. The outside of the instrument is suitably cleaned using a soft, line-free dust cloth. Make sure that the air vents are not obstructed.

  • Page 849: Error Messages

    ® Error Messages R&S SMU200A Status Information 9 Error Messages This chapter describes the error messages of the R&S SMU. The error messages are output in the "Info" line on the screen and entered in the error error/event queue of the status reporting system.

  • Page 850: Status Information Displayed To The Left Of The Info Line

    ® Error Messages R&S SMU200A Status Information This allows the target frequency at the output of a downstream instrument to be entered in the frequency field. The signal generator changes the RF output frequency according to the entered offset. However, the frequency entered and displayed in the "Frequency/Phase" menu of the "RF/A Mod"...

  • Page 851: Status Information Displayed In The Info Line

    ® Error Messages R&S SMU200A Status Information The LOCAL key switches the instrument from remote control to manual operation. The current command must be fully processed before the mode is switched, otherwise the instrument switches immediately back to remote control.

  • Page 852: Error Messages

    ® Error Messages R&S SMU200A Error Messages AttFixed Attenuator fixed mode is active. The uninterrupted level settings are made in a fixed range without attenuator switching. The variation range is set automatically when this mode is activated. The range is dis- played under "Attenuator Fixed Range"...

  • Page 853: Scpi-Error Messages

    ® Error Messages R&S SMU200A SCPI-Error Messages The message is displayed until the error is eliminated. It covers the status display in the info line. After error elimination, the message automatically disappears and is also recor- ded in the history.
  • Page 854 ® Error Messages R&S SMU200A Device-Specific Error Messages Error Error Description Remedy Code Adjustment failed Adjustment could not be executed The adjustment data have to be generated first by an internal or external adjustment or to be loa- ded into the device (see chap- ter 5.2.3.1, "Internal Adjust-...
  • Page 855 ® Error Messages R&S SMU200A Device-Specific Error Messages Error Error Description Remedy Code Filename missing The required operation cannot be exe- A file name has to be entered cuted because the file name is not when creating a new list.

  • Page 857: A Hardware Interfaces

    ® Hardware Interfaces R&S SMU200A AUX I/O Connector A Hardware Interfaces This section describes the pin assignment of the monitor connector. The remote control interfaces are described in chapter 6, "Remote Control Basics", on page 449. The AUX IO interface is described with the associated configuration dialog in chap- ter 5.2.3.12, "User Marker / AUX I/O...

  • Page 858: A.2 Monitor Connector (Monitor)

    ® Hardware Interfaces R&S SMU200A Monitor Connector (MONITOR) Signal Description USER 3 USER input/output which can be configured for various purposes. USER 4 USER input/output which can be configured for various purposes. MARKER 3 Output for the freely programmable marker signal 3 of Path A. The output is permanently assigned.

  • Page 859: A.3 Bert Connector

    ® Hardware Interfaces R&S SMU200A BERT Connector A.3 BERT Connector The 9-pin Sub-D connector BERT at the rear panel is available for the input signals of the integrated bit error rate tester (option BER/BLE Measurement (R&S SMU-K80)). Table 1-3: Pin assignment of the BERT connector...
  • Page 860 ® Hardware Interfaces R&S SMU200A BERT Connector Fig. 1-1: BERT circuit diagram Operating Manual 1007.9845.32 ─ 15...

  • Page 861: List Of Commands

    ® List of Commands R&S SMU200A List of Commands *CAL................................489 *CLS................................490 *ESE................................490 *ESR................................490 *IDN................................490 *IST................................491 *OPC................................491 *OPT................................491 *PCB................................491 *PRE................................492 *PSC................................492 *RCL................................492 *RST................................492 *SAV................................493 *SRE................................493 *STB................................493 *TRG................................493 *TST................................493 *WAI................................494 :BERT:RESult..............................514 :BERT:SEQuence............................516 :BERT:SETup:CLOCk[:POLarity]........................516 :BERT:SETup:DATA[:POLarity]........................517 :BERT:SETup:DENable..........................517 :BERT:SETup:IGNore............................518 :BERT:SETup:MCOunt..........................519 :BERT:SETup:MERRor..........................519 :BERT:SETup:RESTart:STATe........................519 :BERT:SETup:TYPE............................520 :BERT:STARt..............................521 :BERT:STATe..............................521 :BERT:STOP..............................521...
  • Page 862 ® List of Commands R&S SMU200A :CALibration<hw>:BBIN[:MEASure].......................524 :CALibration<hw>:FMOFfset[:MEASure].......................524 :CALibration<hw>:FREQuency[:MEASure]....................524 :CALibration<hw>:IQModulator:FULL......................525 :CALibration<hw>:IQModulator:LOCal......................525 :CALibration<hw>:LEVel:HACCuracy[:STATe]....................526 :CALibration<hw>:LEVel:STATe........................526 :CALibration<hw>:LEVel[:MEASure]......................525 :CLOCk:INPut:FREQuency..........................526 :CLOCk:INPut:SLOPe............................526 :CLOCk:OUTPut:MODE..........................527 :CLOCk:OUTPut:SOURce..........................527 :DEVice:PRESet............................494 :DIAGnostic:INFO:OTIMe..........................529 :DIAGnostic:INFO:POCount..........................529 :DIAGnostic<hw>:BGINfo..........................528 :DIAGnostic<hw>:BGINfo:CATalog.......................528 :DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff..........................529 :DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe]..........................530 :FORMat:BORDer............................530 :FORMat:SREGister............................531 :FORMat[:DATA]............................531 :HCOPy:DATA...............................533 :HCOPy:DEVice.............................533 :HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage..........................533 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]............................534 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO.........................534 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory......................535 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory:CLEar.....................535 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:FILE........................535 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:STATe......................538 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:DAY......................536 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:DAY:STATe..................536 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:MONTh....................536 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:MONTh:STATe..................537...
  • Page 863 ® List of Commands R&S SMU200A :KBOard:LAYout............................541 :MMEMory:CATalog............................545 :MMEMory:CATalog:LENGth.........................546 :MMEMory:CDIRectory..........................547 :MMEMory:COPY............................547 :MMEMory:DATA............................548 :MMEMory:DCATalog............................548 :MMEMory:DCATalog:LENGth........................549 :MMEMory:DELete............................549 :MMEMory:LOAD:STATe..........................549 :MMEMory:MDIRectory..........................550 :MMEMory:MOVE............................550 :MMEMory:MSIS............................551 :MMEMory:RDIRectory..........................551 :MMEMory:STORe:STATe..........................551 :OUTPut:ALL[:STATe]...........................552 :OUTPut:BLANk:POLarity..........................554 :OUTPut:USER<ch>:SOURce........................557 :OUTPut<hw>:AFIXed:RANGe:LOWer......................552 :OUTPut<hw>:AFIXed:RANGe:UPPer......................553 :OUTPut<hw>:AMODe..........................553 :OUTPut<hw>:BLANk:LIST:STATe.......................554 :OUTPut<hw>:IMPedance..........................555 :OUTPut<hw>:PROTection:CLEar........................555 :OUTPut<hw>:PROTection:STATe.......................555 :OUTPut<hw>:PROTection:TRIPped......................556 :OUTPut<hw>[:STATe]..........................556 :OUTPut<hw>[:STATe]:PON.........................556 :SOURce<hw>:PRESet..........................494 :SYSTem:BEEPer:STATe..........................789 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:LTERminator....................789 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RESource.....................790 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess..................789 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:RESource....................790 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:COMMon]:DOMain................790...
  • Page 864 ® List of Commands R&S SMU200A :TEST<hw>:DIRect............................798 :TRIGger:BERT[:IMMediate]..........................523 :TRIGger:BLER[:IMMediate]..........................523 :TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep:SOURce.........................800 :TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep[:IMMediate]......................800 :TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:SOURce......................799 :TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep:SOURce.........................801 :TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep[:IMMediate]......................800 :TRIGger<hw>[:SWEep]:SOURce.........................802 :TRIGger<hw>[:SWEep][:IMMediate]......................801 :UNIT:ANGLe..............................802 :UNIT:POWer..............................803 INITiate<ch>[:POWer]:CONTinuous......................558 READ<ch>[:POWer]............................558 SENSe<ch>:UNIT[:POWer]...........................565 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:STATe..................559 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:DISPlay:PERManent:PRIority..................559 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:DISPlay:PERManent:STATe..................559 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:LENGth:AUTO....................560 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:LENGth[:USER]....................560 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio......................561 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio:MTIMe....................561 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:SONCe......................561 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:TYPE......................562 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FREQuency........................562 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet........................563 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet:STATe......................563 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SNUMber........................563 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SOURce........................564 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:STATus[:DEVice].......................564 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SVERsion........................564 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:TYPE..........................565 SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:ZERO.........................565 STATus:OPERation:CONDition........................785 STATus:OPERation:ENABle.........................785...
  • Page 865 ® List of Commands R&S SMU200A SYSTem:PRESet............................495 SYSTem:SERRor............................794 SYSTem:VERSion............................795 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:BBANd:SENSitivity.......................567 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:BBANd[:STATe]......................567 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:EXTernal:COUPling......................568 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:SENSitivity........................568 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:SOURce........................569 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:STATe..........................569 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM[:DEPTh]........................568 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:BRATe........................570 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:BWIDth........................570 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:BWIDth:NOISe......................571 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:BWIDth:RATio......................571 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:CNRatio........................571 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:DISP:MODE......................572 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:DISP:ORESults.......................572 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:ENRatio........................573 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:FREQuency:RESult....................573 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:FREQuency:TARGet....................573 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:MODE........................574 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:POWer:CARRier.....................574 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:POWer:MODE......................575 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:POWer:NOISe......................576 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:POWer:NOISe:TOTal.....................576 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:POWer:RMODe......................576 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:POWer:SUM......................577 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:POWer:SUM:PEP....................577 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:STATe........................578 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:CLOCk:MODE....................685 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:CLOCk:MULTiplier...................686 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:CLOCk:SOURce....................686 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:TRIGger:ARM:EXECute...................677 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:TRIGger:EXECute....................677 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:TRIGger:OBASeband:DELay................677...
  • Page 866 ® List of Commands R&S SMU200A [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:TRIGger[:EXTernal<ch>]:SYNChronize:OUTPut..........680 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:CLOCk........................582 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:CLOCk:MODE......................582 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:CLOCk:MULTiplier....................583 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:CLOCk:SOURce....................583 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CARRier:COUNt..................598 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CARRier:SPACing................599 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CARRier<ch>:DELay................599 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CARRier<ch>:FILE................599 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CARRier<ch>:PHASe................600 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CARRier<ch>:POWer................600 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CARRier<ch>:STATe................600 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CFACtor:MODE...................601 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CLIPping:CFACtor................601 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CLIPping:CUToff..................602 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CLIPping[:STATe]................602 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CLOCk....................603 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CLOad....................603 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:CREate....................603 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:DELay:STEP...............604 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:DELay[:STARt]............604 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:EXECute..............604 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:FILE................605 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:PHASe:STEP..............605 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:PHASe[:STARt]............606 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:POWer:STEP..............606 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:POWer[:STARt]............606 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:STARt................607 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:STATe.................607 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:STOP................607 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:OFILe....................607 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:PRESet....................608 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:SAMPles....................608 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:SETTing:CATalog................608 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:MCARrier:SETTing:LOAD..................609...
  • Page 867 ® List of Commands R&S SMU200A [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:OFFTime................592 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:ONTime................593 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:PATTern................593 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:PULSe:DIVider..............593 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:PULSe:FREQuency............594 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:RMODe....................587 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:SLENgth....................588 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:SLUNit....................588 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:SMODe....................589 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger:SOURce....................589 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger[:EXTernal<1|2>]:DELay.................590 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TRIGger[:EXTernal<1|2>]:INHibit.................590 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TSIGnal:CIQ:CREate....................594 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TSIGnal:CIQ:CREate:NAMed................595 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TSIGnal:CIQ:I.......................595 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TSIGnal:CIQ:Q.....................595 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TSIGnal:RECTangle:AMPLitude................595 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TSIGnal:RECTangle:CREate................594 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TSIGnal:RECTangle:CREate:NAMed..............595 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TSIGnal:RECTangle:FREQuency................595 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TSIGnal:RECTangle:OFFSet................596 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TSIGnal:RECTangle:SAMPles................596 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TSIGnal:SINE:CREate..................594 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TSIGnal:SINE:CREate:NAMed................595 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TSIGnal:SINE:FREQuency...................596 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TSIGnal:SINE:PHASe..................597 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:TSIGnal:SINE:SAMPles..................597 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:WAVeform:CATalog.....................610 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:WAVeform:CATalog:LENGth................611 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:WAVeform:DATA....................611 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:WAVeform:DELete....................612 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:WAVeform:FREE....................612 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:WAVeform:HDDStreaming:BLEVel..............613 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:WAVeform:HDDStreaming:STATe...............613 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARB:WAVeform:POINts....................613...
  • Page 868 ® List of Commands R&S SMU200A [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:CFACtor........................689 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:AQPSk:ANGLe.......................639 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:ASK:DEPTh......................639 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:CLISt:CATalog......................646 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:CLISt:COPY......................647 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:CLISt:DATA......................648 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:CLISt:DELete......................648 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:CLISt:FREE......................646 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:CLISt:POINts......................649 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:CLISt:SELect......................649 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:CLISt:TAG......................647 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:CLOCk:MODE......................625 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:CLOCk:MULTiplier....................625 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:CLOCk:SOURce.....................626 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:CODing........................640 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:DLISt:CATalog......................646 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:DLISt:COPY......................647 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:DLISt:DATA......................650 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:DLISt:DATA:APPend....................650 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:DLISt:DELete......................651 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:DLISt:FREE......................646 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:DLISt:POINts......................651 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:DLISt:SELect......................652 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:DLISt:TAG......................647 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:FILTer:OSAMpling....................636 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:FILTer:OSAMpling:AUTO..................637 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:FILTer:PARameter:APCO25..................637 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:FILTer:PARameter:COSine..................637 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:FILTer:PARameter:GAUSs..................637 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:FILTer:PARameter:LPASSEVM................637 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:FILTer:PARameter:LPASs..................637 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:FILTer:PARameter:PGAuss...................637 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:FILTer:PARameter:RCOSine.................637 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:FILTer:PARameter:SPHase...................637 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:FILTer:TYPE......................638...
  • Page 869 ® List of Commands R&S SMU200A [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:PATTern.........................621 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:PRAMp:ATTenuation....................642 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:PRAMp:BBONly[:STATe]..................643 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:PRAMp:FDELay.....................643 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:PRAMp:RDELay.....................643 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:PRAMp:SHAPe......................644 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:PRAMp:SOURce....................644 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:PRAMp:TIME......................644 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:PRAMp[:STATe].....................644 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:PRBS[:LENGth]......................621 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:PRESet........................622 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:SETTing:CATalog....................654 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:SETTing:DELete.....................654 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:SETTing:LOAD.......................655 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:SETTing:STORe.....................655 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:SOURce.........................622 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:SRATe........................623 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:STANdard.......................623 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:STANdard:ULISt:CATalog..................655 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:STANdard:ULISt:DELete..................656 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:STANdard:ULISt:LOAD..................656 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:STANdard:ULISt:STORe..................656 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:STATe........................624 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:SWITching:SOURce....................624 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:SWITching:STATe....................624 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:TRIGger:ARM:EXECute..................626 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:TRIGger:EXECute....................627 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:TRIGger:EXTernal:SYNChronize:OUTPut.............627 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:TRIGger:OBASeband:DELay.................628 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:TRIGger:OBASeband:INHibit.................628 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:TRIGger:OUTPut:DELay:FIXed................629 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay................629 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay:MAXimum..............630 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay:MINimum..............630 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:MODE................633...
  • Page 870 ® List of Commands R&S SMU200A [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:GRAPhics:SRATe:USER....................658 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:GRAPhics:STATe......................658 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:GRAPhics:TRIGger:SOURce..................658 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:IQRatio.......................660 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:LEAKage:I....................660 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:LEAKage:Q....................660 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:OPTimization:MODE.................661 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:OPTimization:STATe.................661 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:OPTimization:UCORrection:ACCuracy.............661 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:OPTimization:UCORrection:BWIDth............662 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:OPTimization:UCORrection:CATalog............662 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:OPTimization:UCORrection:EDEVices............662 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:OPTimization:UCORrection:FILE..............663 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:OPTimization:UCORrection:FILE:STATus..........663 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:OPTimization:UCORrection:FREQuency:MAX.........664 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:OPTimization:UCORrection:FREQuency:MIN...........664 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:OPTimization:UCORrection:FREQuency:OFFSet........665 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:OPTimization:UCORrection:IAFixed............665 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:OPTimization:UCORrection:LEVel:MAX...........665 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:OPTimization:UCORrection:LEVel:MIN.............666 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:OPTimization:UCORrection:LEVel:OFFSet..........666 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:OPTimization:UCORrection:TYPE............666 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:QUADrature[:ANGLe]................667 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IMPairment:STATe......................667 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:IQGain...........................727 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:CARRier:COUNt....................668 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:CARRier:LIST:PHASe..................669 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:CARRier:LIST:POWer..................669 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:CARRier:LIST:STATe..................670 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:CARRier:PHASe....................671 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:CARRier:POWer....................671 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:CARRier:SPACing....................672 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:CARRier:STATe....................672 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:CFACtor......................672 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:CFACtor:MODE....................673...
  • Page 871 ® List of Commands R&S SMU200A [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MEASurement:POWer:RMS..................687 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MEASurement:RTIMe....................688 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MEASurement:SOURce....................688 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MEASurement[:STATe]....................688 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MFPCorrection......................689 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:PGAin..........................579 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:POFFset........................580 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:POWer:PEAK........................690 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:POWer:RMS.........................690 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ROUTe..........................580 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW[:TRIGger]:SEQuence..................680 [:SOURce<hw>]:BBIN:CDEVice........................691 [:SOURce<hw>]:BBIN:GIMBalance.......................692 [:SOURce<hw>]:BBIN:MODE........................693 [:SOURce<hw>]:BBIN:MPERiod........................693 [:SOURce<hw>]:BBIN:OFFSet:I........................693 [:SOURce<hw>]:BBIN:OFFSet:Q........................693 [:SOURce<hw>]:BBIN:SRATe:FIFO[:STATus]....................697 [:SOURce<hw>]:BBIN:SRATe:SOURce......................697 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency................699 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency:POINts..............700 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer..................700 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer:MLEVel:STATe............701 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer:MLEVel<ch>..............701 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer:POINts.................700 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA[:SENSor<ch>][:POWer]:SONCe..........702 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET[:SELect]....................706 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog.................702 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension..............703 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect................703 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn............704 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal............704 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:EXECute...................705 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:MODE..................705 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:SELect..................706...
  • Page 872 ® List of Commands R&S SMU200A [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:PHASe:CONTinuous:HIGH................716 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:PHASe:CONTinuous:LOW................716 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:PHASe:CONTinuous:MODE................716 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:PHASe:CONTinuous:STATe................717 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:SPAN......................717 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STARt......................718 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STEP:MODE....................720 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STEP[:INCRement]..................719 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STOP......................719 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency[:CW|:FIXed]....................713 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency[:CW|:FIXed]:RCL....................713 [:SOURce<hw>]:INPut:MODext:IMPedance....................721 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:CREStfactor........................723 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:GAIN..........................724 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:IMPairment:IQRatio[:MAGNitude]..................724 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:IMPairment:LEAKage:I....................724 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:IMPairment:LEAKage:Q....................725 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:IMPairment:QUADrature:[ANGLe].................725 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:IMPairment[:STATe].......................725 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:BIAS:COUPling[:STATe]..................728 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:BIAS:I.......................729 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:BIAS:OPTimization[:RF]:STATe..............730 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:BIAS:Q......................729 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:DIGital:CDEVice....................733 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:DIGital:PON.....................734 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:DIGital:POWer:LEVel..................735 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:DIGital:POWer:PEP..................735 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:DIGital:POWer:STEP:MODE................736 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:DIGital:POWer:STEP[:INCRement]..............736 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:DIGital:SRATe....................737 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:DIGital:SRATe:FIFO[:STATus]................737 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:DIGital:SRATe:SOURce..................738 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:DIGital:STATe....................738 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:LEVel........................730 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:MODE......................731...
  • Page 873 ® List of Commands R&S SMU200A [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect..................751 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn..............751 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal..............752 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:EXECute....................752 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:MODE....................752 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:SELect....................753 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl........................753 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREQuency........................754 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREQuency:POINts....................754 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex.........................754 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex:STARt......................755 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex:STOP.......................755 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:LEARn........................756 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:MODE.........................756 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:POWer........................757 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:POWer:AMODe......................757 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:POWer:POINts......................757 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:RESet.........................758 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:SELect........................758 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:TRIGger:EXECute......................758 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:TRIGger:SOURce......................759 [:SOURce<hw>]:MODulation[:ALL]:STATe....................759 [:SOURce<hw>]:PHASe..........................760 [:SOURce<hw>]:PHASe:REFerence......................761 [:SOURce<hw>]:PM:EXTernal:COUPling......................762 [:SOURce<hw>]:PM:MODE...........................762 [:SOURce<hw>]:PM:SENSitivity........................763 [:SOURce<hw>]:PM:SOURce........................763 [:SOURce<hw>]:PM:STATe..........................763 [:SOURce<hw>]:PM[:DEViation]........................761 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC:OMODe......................764 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC:SONCe......................764 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC[:STATe]......................765 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:LIMit[:AMPLitude]....................767 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:MANual........................768...
  • Page 874 ® List of Commands R&S SMU200A [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:MODE.......................781 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:POINts......................782 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:SHAPe......................782 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:SPACing:MODE..................783 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:STEP[:LOGarithmic].................783 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:RESet[:ALL]......................784 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:DWELl.....................776 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:EXECute..................777 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE.....................777 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:POINts.....................778 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SHAPe....................778 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing..................779 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic................780 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear].................779 [:SOURce]:BB:IQOutput:SOURce.........................728 [:SOURce]:BB:PATH:COUNt.........................579 [:SOURce]:BBIN:ALEVel:EXECute........................691 [:SOURce]:BBIN:CFACtor..........................691 [:SOURce]:BBIN:FOFFset..........................692 [:SOURce]:BBIN:IQSWap[:STATe]........................692 [:SOURce]:BBIN:OLOad:HOLD:RESet......................694 [:SOURce]:BBIN:OLOad:HOLD:STATe......................694 [:SOURce]:BBIN:OLOad:STATe........................694 [:SOURce]:BBIN:PGAin..........................695 [:SOURce]:BBIN:POWer:PEAK........................695 [:SOURce]:BBIN:POWer:RMS........................695 [:SOURce]:BBIN:ROUTe..........................695 [:SOURce]:BBIN:SKEW..........................696 [:SOURce]:BBIN:SRATe:ACTual........................696 [:SOURce]:BBIN:STATe..........................697 [:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:CATalog.......................699 [:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:DELete......................702 [:SOURce]:INPut:BERT:IMPedance......................522 [:SOURce]:INPut:BERT:THReshold......................522 [:SOURce]:INPut:DATA:IMPedance......................720...
  • Page 875 ® List of Commands R&S SMU200A [:SOURce]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE..................743 [:SOURce]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:POINts..................744 [:SOURce]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SHAPe..................744 [:SOURce]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing..................745 [:SOURce]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic..............746 [:SOURce]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear]................745 [:SOURce]:LFOutput:VOLTage........................746 [:SOURce]:LFOutput[:STATe]........................742 [:SOURce]:PATH:COUNt..........................760 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency.....................773 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:RFOFf:STATe..................774 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:SBANdwidth.....................774 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:SOURce........................775 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust:VALue..................774 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust[:STATe]..................775 {CLOCK: frequency}............................498 {COMMENT: string} ............................499 {CONTROL LENGTH: ControlLength}......................500 {CONTROL LIST WIDTH4–Length: #m0m1…mx…mM-1}................509 {COPYRIGHT: string}............................499 {DATA BITLENGTH: BitLength}........................499 {DATA LIST-Length: #d0d1...dx...dN-1…}.....................500 {DATE: yyyy-mm-dd;hh:mm:ss}........................500...

  • Page 876: Index

    ® Index R&S SMU200A Index Symbols AM State ..............235, 569 Analog Wideband I/Q In ......... 278, 726 140 - This modulation forces other modulations off ..833 Angle Alpha ..............355 182 - Adjustment data missing ........834 Append ..............403, 410 183 - Adjustment data invalid .........
  • Page 877 ® Index R&S SMU200A comma ..............474 command line structure ........... 474 Calibration common ..............450 remote ..............489 double dagger ............474 Carrier/Noise Ratio ............304 GBIP, addressed ............. 454 Carrier / Noise Ratio ............571 GBIP, universal ............453 Carrier + Interferer Level ........
  • Page 878 ® Index R&S SMU200A Const IQ Test Signal ............400 Data pattern - DM ............351 Controller, external ............46 Data Polarity ............185, 193 Control Lists - DM ..........359, 0 Data Polarity - BERT ............517 Control signals ............... 334 Data Polarity - BLER ............
  • Page 879 ® Index R&S SMU200A DOWN ................472 Execute Trigger ...... 384, 387, 431, 584, 627, 677 Duration - Baseband Signal Level Measurement ... 320 Execute Trigger - DM ............. 359 Duration Baseband Signal Level Measurement ..... 687 Expiration date of option ..........132 Dwell Time ..........
  • Page 880 ® Index R&S SMU200A FM Sensitivity ..............240 FM Source .............. 239, 709 Hardcopy - Destination ........... 151, 533 FM State ..............239, 710 Hardcopy - Printer setup ........152, 153 FREQ OFFSET .............. 829 Hardcopy Device Size ............ 539 Frequency ..............
  • Page 881 ® Index R&S SMU200A Input Waveform File ............420 Installed Assembly ............131 Install SW-Option ............133 Configuration ............. 42 Instrument Config ........... 130, 528 Interface ..............451 Instrument messages ............. 450 IP address ..............451 Instrument settings Remote control interface .......... 449 recall ..............
  • Page 882 ® Index R&S SMU200A LO IN connector ............. 206 Mode - BLER ..............516 LO OUT output ............... 206 Mode - FM .............. 239, 708 LVDS Rate Selftest ..........136, 797 Mode - I/Q out ..............731 LXI .................. 144 Mode - Level Sweep ........
  • Page 883 ® Index R&S SMU200A No Sync BLER ............... 190 OvenCold ............... 832 NRP-Z Info ..............133 Overflow - Digital I/Q Output Settings ....317, 734 NTRansition ..............481 Overflow Hold - Digital I/Q Output Settings .... 317, 734 Number Hardcopy File Name ......... 537 Overlapping Number of Carriers .........
  • Page 884 ® Index R&S SMU200A PhiM Source ..............242 Ramp Time - DM ............ 368, 644 PhiM State ..............242 Ratio Noise/System Bandwidth - AWGN ....302, 571 Ping .................. 63 Recall instrument settings ...... 159, 160, 492, 549 Play list ........... 395, 407, 408, 409 Recall intermediate ............
  • Page 885 ® Index R&S SMU200A RST:MCCW - Carrier State:ON ........670 Selftest:Execute:Baseband Connection Selftest .... 796 Running ..............387, 431 Selftest:Execute:Fader Selftest ........798 Running - Trigger - DM ..........371 Selftest:Execute BBIN A/B Selftest ........ 796 Running Mode ..............630 Selftest:LVDS Rate ............
  • Page 886 ® Index R&S SMU200A Source Power Ramp Control - DM ......... 367 MOD OFF ..............829 Spacing - Level Sweep .......... 259, 783 OvenCold ..............832 Spacing - LF Sweep ..........265, 745 OVERLOAD ............. 830 Spacing - RF Sweep ..........252, 779 REM-LLO ..............
  • Page 887 ® Index R&S SMU200A Syntax elements Trigger Source - LF Sweep ........261, 799 SCPI ................ 474 Trigger Source - List Mode ........268, 759 SYS CTRL ..............831 Trigger Source - RF Sweep ........249, 800 System Bandwidth - AWGN ........302, 570 Trigger Status ..............
  • Page 888 ® Index R&S SMU200A Wait remote ..............494 Wait Time - Setup ..........140, 529 Warnings ..............92, 832 Waveform File ..........382, 612, 614 Waveform Info ..........382, 403, 410 White space ..............474 Wideband setting - I/Q ........... 278, 727 Winbar ................

Table of Contents